JP6638976B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a hit is made based on a winning of a game ball at a starting port, and when the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit gaming state is generated. In this jackpot game state, a large winning prize mouth as a winning prize which is normally closed is opened, and a large number of prize balls can be acquired in a short time by successively winning game balls in the large winning prize opening. . In addition, when the lottery result is a specific jackpot among the jackpots, as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the probability of the jackpot is higher than usual, or the game ball to the starting opening than the normal time. For example, by making the winning of the game easy, the special game state that is advantageous to the player is controlled. In addition, there has been proposed a gaming machine of this type that includes a small hit as a hit type, and generates a small hitting game state when a lottery result is a small hit (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

JP 2012-232154 A

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is not only possible to improve the entertainment interest but also to cause a decrease in the entertainment interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in Yu technique interest.

A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a low profit provision state in which the expected value of the profit is low or a low profit provision state in which a profit is given to the player based on the type of hit drawn by the lottery means. Profit provision control means for controlling the expected value of the profit higher than the low profit provision state to a high profit provision state, and a value of the auxiliary right for controlling the high profit provision state based on the control to the low profit provision state. Supplementary right acquiring means capable of acquiring, supplementary right accumulating means for accumulating as a cumulative value the value of the supplementary right acquired based on controlling to the low profit giving state, accumulating by the supplementary right accumulating means Bei and a supplementary rights accumulation time control means capable of controlling the high-income applied state by having a predetermined achievement value satisfying the condition as a value the accumulated value of the auxiliary right to be , The value itself of the accumulated value being accumulated is so the player can not know the value of the accumulated value by the supplementary rights of values obtained become per controlling the low income grant state given When the value that satisfies the achievement condition of the above, in the low profit provision state that satisfies the predetermined achievement condition, the game in the low profit provision state in a form in which the player can recognize that it is controlled to the high profit provision state. Is performed, and is controlled by the value of the accumulative value being a value satisfying the predetermined achievement condition by the value of the supplementary right acquired as a hit controlled in the low profit provision state. The high profit provision state is controlled to the high profit provision state without performing a normal game after the end of the low profit provision state, and the control to the high profit provision state is controlled to the low profit provision state. When the value of the accumulated value in per which the performed by the supplementary rights accumulation time control means by which a predetermined achievement condition is satisfied values, the value of the supplementary rights acquired by the auxiliary rights acquisition means The value of the accumulated value that has been accumulated becomes the initial value, and the profit provision state provided based on the lottery by the lottery means is such that the low profit provision state where the expected value of the profit is low is the expected value of the profit. A gaming machine characterized by being more easily provided than in the high profit providing state having a high value .

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in Yu technique interest.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main part frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko machine concerning an embodiment, and the door frame was opened to the main part frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame of the pachinko machine as viewed from behind. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper support of the main body frame and the upper support of the outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support bracket of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) viewed from below. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part for demonstrating the effect | action of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the door frame base unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the right side decoration unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the left side decoration unit after disassembly. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the plate unit and disassembled from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the plate unit. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a state where a pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame, which is exploded and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device which is exploded and seen from the rear. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front from the disassembly of the foul cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. It is a front view showing the state where the front cover of the foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of a ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the front with the ball feed unit exploded, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member viewed from the front, and (D). It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the substantially vertical center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the main frame from the front by disassembling. It is the perspective view which looked at after disassembling the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main part frame base in a main part frame. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a hit ball launching device in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit ball launching device in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after award ball unit was disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball apparatus in the prize ball unit later and disassembled. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board unit in a main part frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the board unit from the exploded view. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the board unit. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the fastening mechanism in the back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a slide rod for a door frame and a slide rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement of the sliding rod for door frames and the sliding rod for main body frames in a lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main-body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the game board from the exploded view. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the game board. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the back in FIG. 103. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view of a gaming panel of the gaming board of FIG. 103, which is cut in a vertical direction. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a front component according to an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like, as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind in FIG. 106. FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state where the game board was stored in the main part frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (B) is an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) It is a hit determination table used in a lottery process for a hit, and (B) is a symbol determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS regular process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a front side opened by being pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed. A game frame 4 having a box frame-shaped main frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a front face of the main frame 3 and the game panel 4 A door frame 5 pivotally supported on the body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game ball is disposed below the game window 101 and stores game balls. A dish-like upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 are provided, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has, as viewed in a front view, an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. At a position below the main frame 3 and the door frame 5, a decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 has a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 when viewed from the front, and projects forward below the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. The player cannot insert a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to touch a game ball, an obstacle nail (not shown), various winning openings, a public item, or the like. In addition, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a back cover 900 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper support of the main frame and the upper support of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support member of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction and left and right sides extending in the vertical (up and down) direction. It comprises frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13. By connecting them, they are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). And an engagement notch 15 which is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, a mounting step 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step 10a. It has become.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protruding portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are increased (see FIGS. 9 and 108). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facilities of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there are some drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 and is fixed in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extends from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the up-down direction, and is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted into and engaged with the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetric. And the vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear portions. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in left-right symmetric shapes, respectively. Have been.

  The connecting member 14 has an upper surface and a lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is formed by engaging notches of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. A predetermined screw is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 in a state where the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame 11 are inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. The connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates through the side frame plates 12, 13 in a state where the vertical pieces 18 abut on the inner side surfaces at the upper ends of the side frame plates 12, 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12, 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates through the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13 and a predetermined screw is formed. Are screwed into the vertical pieces 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The four connecting members 14 allow the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to be connected. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to an upper support bracket 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support bracket 20. A lower support metal member 21, a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal member 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to a front surface of the reinforcement metal member 22. Decorative cover 23. The upper support member 20 and the lower support member 21 support the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, A support hook hole 20c formed by notching so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame hanging down from the left ends of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) abutting on the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the supporting projecting piece 20b (FIG. 14) and a stop hanging part 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the support hook hole 20c. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. In addition, the upper support member 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing pieces 20a and the hanging fixing pieces 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the support projecting piece 20b is increased by a hanging wall 20e hanging down from the outer edge of the support projecting piece 20b. Can be concealed so that the lock member 27 disposed on the back surface of the player cannot be seen from the player side, so that the appearance can be improved. The support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b has a shape bent in a U-shape so as to be inclined toward the center of the tip from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed. In addition, the width of the support hook hole 20 c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support protrusion 21c protruding forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-shaped protrusion protruding upward from near the front end of the support protrusion 21c. And a support projection 21d. A main frame support hole (not shown) formed in a main frame support 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21. After the support projection 21d of the lower support fitting 21 is inserted into the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 is inserted. Is locked in the support hook hole 20c, so that the main body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported in a freely openable and closable manner.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 at a predetermined distance from each other in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24, 25 are formed in a substantially L-shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to the hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described later in detail, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing bracket 22. The guide plate 26 is provided for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  In addition, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, as shown in FIG. It is rotatably supported with respect to it. The lock member 27 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a stopper 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and a length shorter than the stopper 27a rightward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. An operating portion 27b protruding, an elastic piece 27c protruding from a side opposite to a position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and a distal end of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. Arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L-shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. The elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a smaller width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a to the left increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the distal end contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c has a hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a closes a part of the support hook hole 20c bent in a V shape. The portion is not closed, and a space is formed in the deepest portion of the support hook hole 20c where the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the deepest portion of the support hook hole 20c and the tip side of the stopper portion 27a is the entrance end. In a state in which it faces the stop hanging part 20f of the portion (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper part 27a and the stop hanging part 20f and the state is not in contact). In the pivoted state, the centers of the pivoted pin 633 located at the deepest part of the bent support hook hole 20c and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a are displaced in the oblique direction and face each other. ing. In this normal pivoting state, the pivoting pin 633 that pivotally supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the distal end portion of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load is hardly applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper 27a from the above, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. In addition, since the tip of the stopper 27a is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d, when the operation part 27b is turned to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 is turned smoothly. Has become. Further, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip end surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the pivot pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the hook-shaped support hook 20c and comes into contact with the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, the acting force F is reduced A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on a contact portion between the support pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and a contact force between the pivot support pin 633 and one inner surface of the support hook hole 20c. Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion, the distal end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is supported. The moment to rotate in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) that separates from the protruding piece 20b does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is clamped between the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inner surface of one side of the support hook hole 20c. Hold state. For this reason, even in a normal pivoting state or a state in which the acting force of the pivoting pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is constantly applied to the elastic piece 27 c of the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. The plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep can be prevented, and the pivot pin 633 can be prevented from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Note that even if an excessive force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) to be disengaged from the support projecting piece 20b, one side of the tip of the stopper 27a may be rotated. The lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because the lock member 27 does not rotate in the direction in which it comes into contact with the stop hanging portion 20f and further comes off.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the distal end portion of the stopper member 27a faces a position where no rotational moment is generated due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support projecting piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) of the lock member 27 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, a load is not always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the lock is not performed. Even if the member 27 rotates, the present applicant has pointed out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b because only one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the body frame 3 is supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3. 21 need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the pivot pin 633 of the upper pivot bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the deepest portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the pivot pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, so that the lock member 27 is elastic. The stopper 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state and closes the entrance of the support hook hole 20c at the same time as the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state by being urged by the elastic force of the piece 27c. Is opposed to the pivot pin 633 so that the pivot pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening and closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the body frame 3 is lifted, and the engagement between the body frame shaft support hole formed in the body frame shaft support 644 and the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support metal 21 is released, so that the body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame 2. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the related art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of light metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island because the extruded material is an aluminum alloy). However, since such an operation is performed by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be easily hammered, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island facility without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, it is possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. A game board 4 having a large left-right width when viewed from the front of a peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3 and, at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13, which form the outer shell of the outer frame 2, are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. The outer frame 2 is fastened tightly to the inner surface, and is fastened in a state where the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged. It can be used as a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member that protrudes outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, (Adjacent ball rental machine) so that it can be attached in close contact.

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game window 101 having a vertically long rectangular shape and a slightly vertically long circular (elliptical) inner peripheral shape. The base unit 100, a right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 includes a dish unit 300 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball; and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. , A ball feed unit 580 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and mounted to close the gaming window 101 behind the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front and exploded, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit when viewed from behind, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown, the door frame base unit 100 of the present embodiment has a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape. A frame base body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front left and right outer sides of the game window 101 on the front of the door frame base body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110. It includes a bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. Further, a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not interfere when the side speaker 130 is mounted or removed. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is configured such that a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and a lower portion of the gaming window 101 are covered with a rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be mounted, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably mounted at a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side (open side) ), Which is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 for relaying the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, and a rear side of the handle device relay board 192 is covered. The door frame is disposed on the side opposite to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192, etc. (right side of the center in the left-right direction (axial support side) in rear view) with the handlebar relay board cover 193 and the center in the left-right direction interposed therebetween. A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally supported pivotal support on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) for connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, a reinforcing unit 150 in which a metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like is fixed to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of a synthetic resin, thereby increasing the overall rigidity. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base substrate 194 of the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each of the speakers 130, 222, and 262. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, the decorative boards 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a and 432b provided in the operation unit 400, respectively. 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the wire lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., and the wiring code 196 connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. After being gathered and bundled at the position (support side), the details are described later, but they are held by the wiring holding member 197 and extend rearward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown, the left and right inner edges of the gaming window 101 are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, a square notch 101a at the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivot side (left side in front view). Is formed. In the door frame base main body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side supporting sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 when viewed from the front. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  The door frame base main body 110 is, in addition to the gaming window 101, a speaker mounting portion 111 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speakers 130, and a ball feed unit 580. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 and penetrating in the front-rear direction at predetermined positions of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching a handle bracket 140 which is inclined obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged at the lower right corner and swells forward when viewed from the front is retracted. A wire passage opening 115 through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 has a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 below the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base body 110 in rear view. And a board mounting portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) of the game window 101 for mounting the door frame base substrate 194, and a position closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the lower left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 when viewed from the rear. And a security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting rearward from the rear. In addition, the door frame base body 110 has a glass unit supporting step portion 110a which is recessed forward substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 and which can contact the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the glass unit 590. Two locking member mounting portions 110b projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery and rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190 are further provided.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower side by a predetermined amount, and the door frame protrusion 110c is engaged with an engagement groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. However, the tool can be prevented from entering by the door frame projection 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d into the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 has a plurality of mounting bosses 110e protruding forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. In the door frame base body 110, a mounting portion 110g for mounting a speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker cover 338 are respectively provided at appropriate positions. Is formed.

  In addition, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting concave portion 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower tray ball supply port 310g in the tray unit base 310 of the tray unit 300 described later and the At a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 formed on the front side of the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the security recess 120. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Accordingly, in order to perform an illegal act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole made by a thin drill or the like from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the plate unit 300 is made of metal. It can be prevented by the security member 121, and it is possible to prevent improper conduct.

  Although the detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the center axes is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1 .5m), so that the sound reaches the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. The side speaker 130 mainly outputs sounds in the middle and high frequency range, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, a sound with a high stereo feeling can be output.

  The outer periphery of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched between the substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame is closed. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is mounted on the mounting portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with an open front side as shown in FIGS. Is provided with a stepped portion 195a which is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the step. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base board cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending long in the lateral direction, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and has an I-shaped cross section. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 has a plurality of (in this example, three each for upper and lower) holding holes 197a at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. When the door frame 5 is assembled, the wiring holding member 197 has an end on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and a vertical step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported about the extended axis, and although not shown in detail, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is turned toward the door frame base substrate cover 195, whereby the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base board cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  The wiring holding member 197 is attached to a pair of upper and lower holding holes 197 a in a state where a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is arranged on the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and fastening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in a direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. The portion is pushed forward and pivots in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 closes, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base board cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 toward the main body frame 3 is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the end. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded into two on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 in the lateral direction.

  On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively separated from each other. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base board cover 195 (toward the body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to the present example, the end of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved so that the free end moves toward the body frame 3. The rear frame is rotatably supported and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connector, etc.) caused by being caught or pinched.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts via the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, The wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being blurred in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be securely folded in the horizontal direction to prevent a problem.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is formed between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is formed. Is partly bridged by the wiring holding member 197, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and the wiring cord 196 hangs down to other members. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the wire is caught and the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. And decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, Unit 360, the handle device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of defective wiring cord 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  In addition, a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197. Even when the wiring cord 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. By doing so, the force can be released, so that the wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being pulled, and the wiring cord 196 can be pulled to cause a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connector. Can be prevented. Further, since a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, a conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. No. 213675), the wiring cord 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into a plurality of through-holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring cord 196 is held by the binding band 198. The binding band 198 holding the 196 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a. It can be reliably prevented.

  Further, even if the position where the wiring cord 196 extends from the body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is located at a position away from the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring cord 196 to extend. Since the wiring cord 196 can be prevented from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the 196, the strength and rigidity of the side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft are increased. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention against fraud can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges projecting from both ends in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least to the side along which the wiring cord 196 extends, a pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197 are used. The three sides of the wiring cord 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring cord 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a favorable state.

  Further, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be approximately the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the extension of the main body frame 3 in the wiring cord 196. The determined predetermined position is a position closer to the axis of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, a pantograph-like link is formed at the axis of the member 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring cord 196 extends in the main body frame 3. The movement of the wiring holding member 197, the wiring cord 196, and the like can be made smooth, the opening and closing work can be easily performed, and the excessive force acting on the wiring cord 196 and the like can be reduced to prevent disconnection. To prevent malfunctions from occurring. Can. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring cord 196 extending from the distal end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back at the distal end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame 5 is recessed in the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 so that the door frame 5 is opened toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring cord 196 can be made compact, and the wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring cord 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be reduced as much as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force, an impact force, or the like that opens and closes the door frame 5. Thus, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described operation and effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, the space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 by increasing the size of the game area 1100, and has the large game board 4 and can strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 of the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft from the rear end of the tubular portion 141 to the axis of the tubular portion 141. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction, and a plurality (three in this example) of ridges projecting into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is mounted on the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 of the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three grooves 502a of the handle device 500 match. I have. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which the handle base 502 cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 which is inclined, so that the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 extends to the right (open side) as it goes forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also inclined obliquely.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a door frame base body. 110, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110; And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and these are formed into a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be vertically slidable on the upper surface thereof, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft supports 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the body frame 3. It can be freely opened and closed.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width of the door frame base main body 110, and is provided at the lower long side edge of both long side edges. A lower bent protruding piece 159 bent forward, and an upper bent protruding piece 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view (open side); And a vertically bent protruding piece 161 that is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by a lower bent protrusion 159, an upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. The vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent protruding piece 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the left and right direction and It can be restricted from moving backward. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open-side outer bent protruding pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. And an open-side inner bent protrusion 164. The open-side inner bent protrusion 164 is formed to extend rearward longer than the open-side outer bent protrusion 163 as shown in the drawing. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 is provided at a lower rear portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 in contact with a hook portion 1041 for a door frame of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped support-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at an outer end of a long side thereof and opens outward on the support side (FIG. 108). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 includes bent protruding pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper supporting part 156 and the lower supporting part 158. When an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a bur is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. Although the act may be easily performed, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased because the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the supporting-side U-shaped protrusion 166. In addition, the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. The U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. 108), the insertion of a tool can be prevented, and the bending of only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented, so that the security function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function for covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized devices from entering the game board 4. As shown in the figure, the security cover 180 is made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153 of the game board 4, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It has a contact recess 181 formed, and a security post 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on both left and right ends of the security cover 180, security rear end protrusions 183 projecting rearward along the end shape are provided, respectively. In addition, in the rear view, the right side (supporting side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite side (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security projection 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and a left and right side outside the security prevention projection 184. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward at the lower end of the mounting member.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching to the security cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the unit can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although not shown in detail, the security pre-projection piece 184 fits with the outer periphery of the lower portion of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, half of the pivot support side is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and half of the open side is projected forward when the door frame 5 is closed. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. Thus, even if an illegal tool is to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the entry can be prevented by the security piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent a ball hitting the glass plate 594 from hitting or feeding back the guide path portion.

  Thereby, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the rear side of the glass unit 590 (the game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are formed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to insert a highly flexible tool into the pachinko machine and perform an illegal action inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100), the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, and Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having higher safety against the like can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with a fitting portion 190a that rotatably fits into a locking member mounting portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the stopper piece 592a of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is configured to be rotatably supported on the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side. It is a finger when operating.

  The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In a state where the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hit ball firing device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decorative unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front by exploding. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  As shown, the right side decorative unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right outer half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 except for the lower part in front view, and the inside is the gaming window 101. In addition to being formed in an arc shape along the outside, the outside is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed behind the side lens 210, A right side upper decorative board 214 on the rear side of which the plurality of LEDs 214a (full-color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the rear side of the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from a substantially vertical center and a side inner side on the lower side A lower right side decorative board 216 on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) are mounted on the surface and disposed on the lower side from substantially the center in the vertical direction of the lens 212, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214 Right side mounted on the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decorative substrate 214 An upper decorative substrate cover 218 and a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative substrate 216 therebetween. ing.

  The right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in a circumferential direction of the game window 101 on a front surface of the side lens 210 and a side outer cover 202 attached to an upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending about the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the upper side lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the upper side inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the upper side inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surfaces (front surfaces) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, respectively. 216a, 216b and the like cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like allows the right side decorative unit 200 to efficiently emit light. The decoration substrates 214 and 216 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative board 214 and the lower right side decorative board 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control section 4140, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control section 4140. , 216b to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can emit light.

  As shown, the side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view, and a left end thereof as a game window 101 in a front view. Is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a having a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens part 210b composed of a prism surface. As shown, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower center portion of the game window 101 in a front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  The side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 can be widely diffused rightward and vertically in the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker 222, and sound from the upper right speaker 222 is transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted well.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the side lens 210. As shown, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses on a crest portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by using a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. In addition, the perspective can be made to look strange and unclear.

  The right upper decorative board 214 and the right lower decorative board 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a used have relatively large irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b of the side lenses 210 emit relatively light. Those having a small angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) are used. Note that the LEDs 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 in front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and generates noise for other pachinko machines. It is becoming difficult. In addition, similarly to the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a front surface formed in a wrinkle shape, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed in a crest portion protruding forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion. The light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted into the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky surface formed by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. In addition, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the upper right decorative board 214 and the lower right decorative board 216 disposed on the rear side, and can also perform the peripheral lens section 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front by being disassembled. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  As shown, the left side decorative unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating a left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in a front view, and the right side is the gaming window 101 as viewed from the front. It is formed in an arc shape along with the left side and the upper side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a plurality of large window frames 242a extending substantially in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially equal to the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and an elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous with the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row. And a frame-shaped upper side decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  Further, the left side decorative unit 240 includes a side flash lens 246 fitted into each of the small window frames 242b and 244b of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a side flash lens 246 on the rear side. And a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a that are supported from behind and are fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side. A plurality of slits 251a which are arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extend in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and have an inner decoration member 251 having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface; and a rear side of the inner decoration member 251 Bands extending radially around the lower left and right centers of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from above substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) mounted on the surface thereof. A substrate 254, a lower side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the lower side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256 a (full color LED) and 256 b (white LED) mounted on the surface; A left upper decorative board cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper decorative board 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. Left side lower decorative board cover attached to side lens 250 so as to sandwich lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is provided with an upper left speaker 262 disposed in front of the side inner lens 252 and at the upper right portion in front view, and a transparent upper portion speaker 262 which supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the upper right portion of the front of the side inner lens 252. A diffuser formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted into the inner decoration member 251 on the upper right in front view from the rear side and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the left side upper decorative substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). The side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely formed of milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the small window is located in the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). Opening frames 242c, 244c penetrating the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 in a cut-out state are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b), and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by a side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 cannot be viewed from the player side by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side through 250a. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251. The light is diffusely refracted by the diffusion part 252a, so that the light passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and is behind the side inner lens 252. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left decorative substrate 254 and the lower left decorative substrate 256 disposed behind the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  The front surfaces of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 are white, and the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like allows the left side decorative unit 240 to efficiently emit light. The decorative boards 254 and 256 are not so noticeable when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left decorative board 254 and the lower left decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control section 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control section 4140. Is emitted as appropriate, so that the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 of the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example extends vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open rear side. The lower side decorative frame 242 extends along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of large window frames 242a that are disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrate in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the gaming window 101 side and outside the pachinko machine 1), penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is cut out to the side, are provided. Is formed.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 is substantially triangular in front view, extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and continuing from the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The upper side decorative frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the gaming window 101 side and outside the pachinko machine 1), penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

  The upper side decorative frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form the outer peripheral frame of the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the corresponding side flash lens 246. The upper side decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the lower side decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a, 244a, the small window frames 242b, 244b, and the opening frames 242c, 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized.

  The side lens 250 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side and the upper side of the game window 101 from the center to the left side. I have. The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a concave shape rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smoothly curved surface, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is provided behind the peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is also concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 in the width direction. There are several. The inner decorative member 251 has a front surface on which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. I have. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted from the rear side into each of the inner decoration members 251. The diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 has a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the direction in which the band-shaped lens extends is disposed on the front side. The decoration member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonally) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. However, since light is irregularly refracted by a plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a, the diffusion The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. As shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusing portions 252a, and the light from the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  Further, the left upper decorative board 254 and the left lower decorative board 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large size of the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246). 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) it is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a sound in the middle and high frequency ranges similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. I have. The upper speaker bracket 264 supporting the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) projecting obliquely forward and downward at the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed via a protective plate 268 behind the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player side in front view. It has become. In addition, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent mischief by the upper left speaker 262 and breakage of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 to a player below, and is less likely to generate noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of the present example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes a side lens 250 having a curved transparent peripheral lens part 250a, and a rear lens part 250a disposed on the rear side and on the surface. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metal glossy plating layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and extending in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, which is disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251; A left inner upper decorative substrate 254 and a lower left lower decorative substrate 256 having a side inner lens 252 provided with a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses, and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252; (See FIG. 35 and the like). Accordingly, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Irradiation is performed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (to the side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is partially transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, light reflected toward the inner decorative member 251 on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is transmitted to the surface of the inner decorative member 251. At the (front), the light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear side) converges, and the light reflected on the outer side (front side) is diffused, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a receives direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and peripheral light. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens unit 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is applied to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected by the diffusing portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252 in a stripe shape with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a. (Substantially orthogonal) are diffused. Therefore, a plurality of striped lights having different shadings are radiated (projected) to the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 so as to be longer than the width of the slit 251a and extend in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective can be provided (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit as viewed from the rear after being disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends elongated from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right, and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decoration member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the front end, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decoration member 281. A light-transmitting upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed behind the upper central lens 284. A plate-shaped diffusion lens 285 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed; an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282; and a rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light-shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286; and a light-shielding member 287 disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative board 288 having a plurality of LEDs 288b disposed at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and arranged on the front surface. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 which covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289, and which is mounted on the lower rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. A mounting bracket 292; an upper lower cover 293 that is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the board cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a cutout 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 for closing the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side of the unit base 289 in a front view and formed into a predetermined shape are provided. .

  In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, and the front decoration member 281 is made to glitter by external light. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a center ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. A frame 281b and an extension frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of radially extending band-shaped lenses arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the center of the through-hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Accordingly, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, and a plurality of concentric lenses on the rear side. Is invisible to the public.

  In the upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each a full-color LED, and the upper central lens 284 and the central frame 281a in the front decorative member 281 are provided. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 and the outer periphery thereof can be separately illuminated. Further, in the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each a full-color LED, and these LEDs 290a are connected to the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the insides of the frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light to the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290a.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the dish frame unit at the portion of the door frame at the ball lending unit.

  The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later, and a game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hit ball firing device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped plate unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped upper plate main body 312 which is fixed to the approximate center of the front surface, is open at the upper and lower sides, and has a left-hand side (axial support side) greatly bulged forward when viewed from the front. An upper plate upper panel 314 that is formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward when viewed, an upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and an upper plate front An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314, and a right upper portion of the upper plate upper panel 314 that is continuous with a right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  The plate unit 300 is mounted on the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the lower surface on the right side, and is a plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface, and mounted on the lower side of the substrate mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 322 a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate main body 312 and is open at the top and the rear. A dish-shaped lower dish main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes forward, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish main body 324, and the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is bulged forward substantially in the same manner as the lower dish body 324, and the front end is left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate main body 324 and extends rightward in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening formed on the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 and coaxially with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the left and right center of the lower end. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the open front below the 330a and the upper opening 330a, and a.

  The plate unit 300 also includes a lower plate upper left side cover 332 that extends obliquely and covers the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is disposed at the lower end of the lower plate left upper side cover 332. A lower cover left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate in which the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 is closed from the rear side to allow sound to pass therethrough, and protection. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left lower side cover 334. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with an upper plate front decorative member 316.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed in design. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and formed in a continuous shape, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338; And a cover body 339 having a disc-like shape and a plurality of holes that are gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and swell toward the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, in the plate unit 300, an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 to pull out game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling down the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and a lower unit upper portion on the left side when viewed from the front of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also called a CR unit, not shown).

  The plate unit 300 of the present example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the upper plate main body 312, the upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate main body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on an upper edge extending in the left-right direction. Provided. A ball lending unit mounting portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a and penetrates in the front-rear direction to mount the ball lending unit 360. The dish unit base 310 is arranged below the ball lending unit attachment part 310b (near the upper left corner in front view), and has a horizontally elongated rectangular upper dish ball supply port 310c that penetrates in the front-rear direction. An upper tray ball discharge port 310d which extends in the front-rear direction below and below the right end of the decorative portion 310a in the front-rear direction below the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310); A pair of lower plate support portions 310e, which are disposed immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c, protrude forward and have the same upper surface, are provided. The upper bowl discharge port 310d is formed continuously up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower bowl support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower plate support portions 310e, is fitted with the lower ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and has a horizontally long rectangular lower plate support formed in a front view. It includes a groove 310f, and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed at a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h that extends rearward so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an opening side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  An upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the cutout portions 101a and 162 of the door frame base body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The first sphere outlet 544a of the unit 540 is communicated with. At the front end of the upper dish ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends long in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is also inclined so that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. Is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 through the foul cover unit 540, Since it is impossible to linearly enter the upper plate 301 forward from the upper plate supply port 310c, the dispensed game balls contact the game balls having the front side of the upper plate supply port 310c closed and roll. The direction is changed, the guide recess 310j is guided to roll in the right direction when viewed from the front, and is discharged from near the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game balls close the front of the upper plate supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game balls by hand. Even so, it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling troublesome in storing the game balls in the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by focusing the player on the operation of hitting the game ball or the game with the hit game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Is available.

  The upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 is connected to the opening 344a of the upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 through the door. Further, in the lower counter ball supply port 310g, the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower counter ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the upper counter ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 310g is provided with an opening 310k that expands leftward when viewed from the front. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early occurrence of ball clogging in the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to game balls in the lower dish 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is entirely lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. I have. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 has a rear end on the pivot side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310 and a rear end on the open side in the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls that are formed so as to be located near the vertical intermediate position, respectively, and that are supplied to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In addition, the upper plate main body 312 has a metal upper plate rail 313 that can be in contact with the game ball at the rear end of the bottom surface from the center in the left-right direction to the open side. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 such that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is located outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper ball removing button 341 to be described later penetrates vertically. The upper plate upper panel 314 has a front end formed in a stepped shape lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a stepped shape lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side of the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. I have.

  The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decoration member 316 has a smooth shape on the left side and a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side from the position near the right in the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, the upper plate front decorative member 316, though not shown in detail, has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and can diffuse light erratically. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and has a surface provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster. ing. Accordingly, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the upper plate upper inner decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side. The part seen through is seen from the player side as unclear and the sense of distance is uncertain.

  The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces like the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316. In addition to being formed in a shape integral with the right side portion, the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of an upper tray ball removing button 341 described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) so that light can be irregularly refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. I have. Note that an upper plate decorative board 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate decorative member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is turned on. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 can emit light as appropriate.

  The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape in a plan view and a rear end formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of an upper surface being lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end of the bottom plate 324a except for a rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is lower on the front side and higher on the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

  In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. In addition, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a silver-plated layer having a metallic appearance (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower left upper cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on its surface. Is provided. The opening 334a of the lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later so that sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 is a punched metal having a plurality of holes formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The plate unit 300 of this example is configured such that the bottom surface except for the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334. Is closed by a lower bowl removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper bowl removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl removing button 341 and an upper bowl removing button 341 which are attached to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper upper panel 314 so as to be able to move up and down. The operating piece 342 is moved up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper dish removing button 341 and is supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the up and down movement of an operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and that comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 with the upper plate ball removing slider 343; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the operation piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper countersunk button 341 so that the upper countersunk button 341 is located at the upper moving end is omitted. It is urged upward by a coil spring. In addition, the upper dish removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish removing slider 343 and the upper dish removing base 344.

  The upper bowl removing base 344 of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl discharging port 310d of the bowl unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d to open forward 344a (FIG. 43), and a ball guiding flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 42) that guides a game ball that has communicated with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides the game ball backward. 44), extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, and then extending substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl removing base 344 toward the right side (supporting side) end in rear view. And a ball removal channel 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  The opening 344a communicates with the upper bowl discharging port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b that communicates with the opening 344a has a ball at the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the ball feeding unit 580 is provided. It can be supplied to.

  The upper end of the ball removing channel 344c of the upper bowl removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivot side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 can be used. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower portion of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper ball removing channel cover 345.

  When the upper counter-ball-pulling button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper counter-ball-pulling mechanism 340 slides the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 343 downward, and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. Then, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate extraction base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, the ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball drain channel 344c of the upper ball drain base 344, and from the lower ball feed port 310g to the lower plate 302 through the lower ball feed gutter 310h of the plate unit base 310. Can be discharged to

  Note that the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper counter ball removing slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by a coil spring. Even if the game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partition 581a, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the slider 343 through the operating rod 583c. It is possible to prevent the ball from being damaged and also prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is disposed between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334 below the lower dish main body 324 and forms a bottom central portion of the dish unit 300. A punching base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball extracting base 351 and capable of opening and closing a lower dish ball extracting hole 324 b of the lower dish main body 324, and a rotating shutter 352. And a lower plate removing slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate removing base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate removing slider 353. I have.

  The lower bowl removing base 351 includes a base bowl removing hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower bowl removing hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower countersunk ball hole 324b, and a shutter ball extracting hole disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in a vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower countersunk ball holes 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring 356 so as to be at a position for closing the lower countersunk hole 324b and the base ball extracting hole 351a with respect to the lower countersunk hole base 351. .

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can be brought into contact with the lower plate ball removing slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower plate ball removing slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated so as to move rearward by the lower ball removing slider 353, and the lower ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

  Further, in the lower ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352 b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower ball removing hole 324 b of the lower dish main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351 a of the lower dish removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower ball removing slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided for holding the slider 353 at the predetermined position.

  In a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the like, the lower plate ball removing button 350 moves to the front end in the closed state. In this state, the lower plate hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, game balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower ball pull-out button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower ball pull-out button 354 and the lower ball pull-out slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower plate pull-out slider 353 is opened and closed by sliding backward. The shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter hole 352b move rearward against the urging force of the coil spring 356.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates backward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps the lower ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a. 324b coincides with each other, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball hole 324b. It should be noted that when the lower ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the slide is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower ball removing button 354 is kept in an open state in which the lower ball removing button 354 is retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is connected to the lower ball removing hole 352b. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate 302 is not held down by holding the lower plate ball release button 354.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower bowl removing hole 324b, when the lower bowl removing button 354 that has been retracted is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower bowl removing slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower bowl removing slide 353 is released. The ball-pull slide 353 can slide, and the opening / closing shutter 352 in which the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in a direction to close the lower plate ball hole 324b, the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force. It turns in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the slide 353 for pulling out the lower platen ball slides forward, the closing portion 352a closes the hole 324b for extracting the lower platen ball, and the lower plate release button 354 is pressed down. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, so that game balls can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower bowl removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and presses a ball lending button 361 to place a predetermined number of game balls on the plate unit 300. Can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the loaned amount is returned. I have. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is mounted from the rear side to a ball lending unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the plate unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the ball lending unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the remaining lending display section 363, a lending remaining display section 363 that is disposed behind the front cover 365, and has a lending button 361. And a ball lending unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and a rear side of the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball lending unit board 366. And a rear cover 367 which is attached to the rear cover. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 to which the ball lending unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and is formed between the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 that includes a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the cover 365 and protrusions 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward, respectively, and closing the display opening 310n. , The remaining lending display portion 363 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the plate unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball-lending unit 360 of this example has the ball-lending unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301, directly above the upper plate supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Also, in the ball lending unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball lending button 361. In this example, the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a different color from the plate unit base 310 (ball lending unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easy for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  Further, the ball lending unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (toward the player) from the outer periphery of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301, Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before the hand touches the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage plates. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be reminiscent of a pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) so that anxiety or the like given to a player can be reduced and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. Has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit when the pressing operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player. And an operation unit 405. The operation unit 405 can receive an operation of the player according to a game state, and can operate the dial operation unit 401. , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to a lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 meshing with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416 a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached to the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the lower surfaces of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the plate unit 300; and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface, which is disposed above the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a which is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the circular shape of a circle, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting operation of the pressing operation section 405, and a button decoration board 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation section 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of the present example is formed of a translucent material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder 401a extending in the up-down direction, and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a tubular shape, and being shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a; And a flange portion 401d extending annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d in the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a in the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operating section 401 includes a connection locking section 401e (refer to FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder section 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked to perform the dial operation. The portion 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a in the center direction at a position lower by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder 401a. Although details will be described later, the protrusion 401 f can be brought into contact with the step 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation section 405, and the step 407 a of the button cap 407 By contacting the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from further immersing into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the drawing, the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lower as going toward the center of the dial operating portion 401. The contact surfaces are large when they come into contact with each other. Thereby, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a closed upper end, and has a button body 406 having a bottomed cylindrical shape, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, a button cap 407, A cap inner 408 is provided inside the button 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom is narrowed downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b extending downward from the outer peripheral lower part and having a lower end protruding outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is prevented so that the button main body 406 does not fall out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing section 405) does not rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. In addition, a predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  In addition, the button body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a position different from the lower part of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and that can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration board 432. When the button body 406 (the pressing operation section 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller outer diameter than the upper center in the vertical direction, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper and lower sides. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing section 405) has a lower portion below the step portion 407a and a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and a portion above the step portion 407a has a dial operating portion. The diameter of the inner tube 401 is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner tube 401a and larger than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operation unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder 401a (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation section 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on the outer periphery of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular sliding surface on the lower surface that abuts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 slides and rotates substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. I can do it.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b extending upward from a position facing the upper end and protruding inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking unit 401e of the inner cylinder unit 401a.

  In addition, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and a slit formed between the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c. With 410d, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401, can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detecting piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear meshing with the driven gear 410 as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to be able to rotate integrally with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control a rotation direction, a rotation speed, and a rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 drives the drive gear 412 to rotate via a rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operating motor 401 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) forward and reverse by the dial drive motor 414 in small increments. In addition, by stopping the rotation of the dial driving motor 414 for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b and the like, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. The feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a cylindrical shape and is inside. A button support tube 416b that slidably supports the button in a vertical direction, and a locking protrusion 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom inside the button support tube 416b and lockable with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and 50), and a through hole 416c that passes light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration board 432 through the center of the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and sends the light to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 that vertically penetrates the bottom outside the button support cylinder 416 b and is attached to the button decoration substrate 432. An opening 416d through which the holes 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e vertically penetrating the bottom of the button support tube 416b, and the pressing detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 faces from above, and downward from below. A pair of substrate holding claws 416 g for locking and holding the extended button decorative substrate 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation unit holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and locks the same. It further includes a plurality of abutting portions that can abut on the claw 406b. With this contact portion, the button body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) can rotate within a predetermined angle range, and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420 and positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432 are appropriately positioned. It is provided in.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be capable of dynamic rotation. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be supported via the button main body 406 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. . A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard. The base member 420 allows the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 to be fitted therein and is recessed upward, and the base member 420 vertically penetrates the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is disposed on the opposite side to the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which can at least receive the driven gear 410 and is recessed downward. Have. As shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) legs 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg 420e.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed above and outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located above a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of substrate mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative substrate 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted for the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning each member, a mounting hole, and the like are formed at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The operating member holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from below into the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation unit holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation unit holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly higher than the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower concave portion 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper concave portion 420c in a state where the operating portion holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. , And the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with its lower part opened, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter on the top plate through which the outer cylinder part 401c of the dial operation part 401 can pass and the flange part 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engagement claws 422b projecting downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engagement claws 422b with the engagement portions 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c extending downward from the outer periphery of one of the short-axis directions (the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (the front side in the pachinko machine 1) and having a lower end protruding outward. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

  The upper cover 422 includes a base member 420 to which an operation portion holding member 416, a driven gear 410, a dial decoration substrate 430, a dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the dial operating part 401 can be prevented from being pulled out upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape whose upper side is open, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 has an engaging portion 424b at an upper portion of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1) which can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422. The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown, the cover main body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a penetrating vertically in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extending outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a to attach the operation unit to the plate unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the plate unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although not shown in detail, attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted with the lower surface slightly floating (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) than the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. The cover main body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when the button is pressed or hit.

  In this operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300 with a predetermined screw. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are mounted on the upper surface of the cover body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 has a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 equal to 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detecting piece 410 in the circumferential direction. It has been. As a result, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs between the detection and non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and the rotation by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the detection piece 410c.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist rotation, prevent rotation, or add a click feeling to rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can cause the dial operation unit 401 to vibrate by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step unit 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401, as shown in FIG. 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401a, so that the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is dialed through the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, so that it is hard to break.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment gradually rotates the dial drive motor 414 in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed so that the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projection portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be caused to vibrate together with the dial operation unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 surprises the player and allows the player to enjoy a game or an effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, even if the player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, the operation unit 400 can be prevented from being damaged, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely provided to the player. In addition to being able to be operated, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game by making the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 fun. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the ring-shaped dial operation unit 401, and if the user tries to hit the pressing operation unit 405 strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is likely to hit, too. The force for tapping 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, so that the impact of the tapping is prevented from being concentrated and the operation unit 400 and the plate unit 300 are prevented from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 withstand strong blows, and to allow the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the plate unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300, and when the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 contacts the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact or a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is in contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the plate unit 300) causes an impact. Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, and to reduce the impact resistance and the load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300. Can be enhanced.

  Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of downwardly projecting legs 420e at positions away from the positions where the operation units 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are attached to the operation unit of the plate unit 300. Even if an impact from the operating portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by abutting against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not disposed immediately below the impact, so that the operating portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. Is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the plate unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is held by the operating unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operating unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in a plan view. Even if the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 is disengaged from the base member 420 and moves downward when the operation unit 401 is hit hard from above, the dial operation unit 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420. The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and the fall of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operating unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operating unit 401 that rotates (rotationally drives including vibration) without permission. With this, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effects of the operation units 401 and 405, and can entertain the player. In addition, by appropriately driving the dial operation unit 401 by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit The effect using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) can be made more diverse and hard to get tired of, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and the position of the rotating shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is likely to be adjusted by the dial operating unit 401 (the driven gear). Since the position of the rotation axis can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation axis of 410), even if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation section 401. The direct drive motor 414 can be prevented from being directly applied, and the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even when the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 can It is possible to reliably prevent the temperature from dropping below 420. Further, since the dial operating section 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating section 401 and the operating section holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating section 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation section holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing an impact or a load from the operation section.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating and driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that the dial drive motor 414 is rotationally driven, even if the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and radiated through the base member 420, so that it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from causing a problem due to overheating, and to use the dial drive means 414. Can withstand high loads. It can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, it is provided with rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation of the dial operating unit 401 and a pressing detecting sensor 432c for detecting pressing of the pressing operating unit 405, and the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 are provided. Since the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player can be detected, it is possible to perform an effect in accordance with the operation of the player based on the detection signal. It is possible to provide an effect with a bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 with light are provided. Since the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation section 405 and the protruding section 401f of the dial operation section 401 are in contact with each other. Is pressed, the dial operating unit 401 is repeatedly rotated forward and backward within a predetermined angle range by the dial driving motor 414 and vibrated, so that the dial operating unit 401 is in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 via the stepped portion 407a. The pressing operation section 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, it is possible to give the player an operational feeling for the pressing operation 405, and to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought to be involuntary, and something good. It is possible to make the user think that there is a possibility that the game may occur, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move without permission, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. The operation unit 400 can be easily operated and the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This makes it possible to distribute the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 also to the dial operation unit 401 side even when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, so that the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is hit hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, thereby preventing the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation section 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the up-down direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation section 405, the dial driving is performed. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably recognize the respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and to guide the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The character “PUSH” is not turned or greatly inclined, so that the player can easily read the character. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a to the axial center side, and has a smaller diameter on the outer circumferential surface of the pressing operating portion 405 than a predetermined vertical position. Since the step portion 407a formed by the step 407 is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to the upper end of the operation unit 400. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign substances such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation section 401 to rotate or to press the pressing operation section 405 due to the entry of foreign substances. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, a contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is pressed in a circumferential direction. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling of being inclined (a position deviated to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the pressing operation unit 405 is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. The rotation drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in annular contact, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 and The impact resistance can be further improved.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 via the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially dispersed outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing concentration of the load, and preventing the operation unit 400 from withstanding the load. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased. The occurrence of malfunctions during the game is reduced as much as possible, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of normal rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 can be simply stopped at a predetermined position as well as simply rotated, and can be switched between normal rotation and reverse rotation. It is possible to easily vibrate by repeating the operation, and the operation unit 400 (sling machine 1) having the above-described effects can be embodied reliably.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 are high to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation section 405), and it is possible to easily entertain an effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 of the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front face of the handle body 504. A front end cover 506 which is arranged and is fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle main body 504.

  Further, the handle device 500 has an inner base 508 attached to the front side of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, and a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 rotatable integrally with the shaft 504 and having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. A rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Further, the handle device 500 has one end side attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 via the transmission gear 511 in a clockwise direction in a front view. A biasing auxiliary spring 514, a touch sensor 516 mounted on the rear side of the inner base 508, and a touch stop sensor 516 mounted on the rear surface of the inner base 508 at different positions, and a fire stop switch 518 mounted on the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to actuate the firing stop switch 518, and one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle main body 504, so that the handle main body 504 is in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). End of rotation in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present embodiment has a form in which a front end is opened and a rear end portion which extends rearward in a cylindrical shape from a front end portion which is rounded and bulged rearward is formed. Three grooves 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. Are located. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 such that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. Thus, the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a of the handle main body 504 abutting on the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  In the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is urged by a handle return spring 522 attached at one end to the handle base 502 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of the present embodiment is configured to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via a handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face outward (open side) when viewed from above when viewed from above. The device 500 is also inclined outwardly in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the device 500 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1 so as to be directed outward of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixed. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the rotation operation without a sense of strangeness in the rotation operation.

  In the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the player hits the game ball. Is available. In other words, even if the player attempts to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven, and the player cannot drive the game ball. It is possible to prevent a player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  When the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 153) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive is stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, the operation before the single-shot button 520 is operated is released. A game ball can be fired at the driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle main body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball firing device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 like a conventional pachinko machine are provided with a door. When the frame 5 is closed, there is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened. As well as eliminating the occurrence of malfunctions in the joint unit, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player due to a malfunction of the game ball being hit. It has to be able to bet.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame in a disassembled state as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the door cover frame as viewed in a disassembled state. FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

  The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. In spite of this, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of flow paths for game balls therein, and a front cover 544 for closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the cover communicates with the first ball inlet 542a. A first sphere passage 542b extending rightward in front view toward the front end of the base 542, and a second sphere entrance 542c arranged outside the first sphere entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first sphere entrance 542a. And a second ball passage 542d that communicates with the second ball inlet 542c and extends downward and is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in front view inside the cover base 542. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542 has a portion that extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and has a height that is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed substantially at the upper center in the left-right direction and is open to the upper side with a foul ball inlet 542e, and can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e to guide game balls to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542 g contacts the spherical contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The opening / closing shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. And a second ball outlet 544b disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is configured to be connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h in the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present embodiment transfers the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c to the second ball outlet 542d through the second ball passage 542d. 544b can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g (see FIG. 82).

  Further, although details will be described later, when foul cover unit 540 is in a state where door frame 5 is closed with respect to main body frame 3, foul ball inlet 542 e is positioned below foul space 626 of main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball firing device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls down in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game balls received at foul ball inlet 542e from second ball outlet 544b to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through foul ball passage 542f and second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingably movable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. A rocking member 548 pivotally supported by the first and second sensors, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward in a front view. In such a state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swing member 548 is urged by the spring 552 to a position where the swing member 548 is substantially vertical. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the storage space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of accommodation space 546 in second ball passage 542d, a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of cover base 542 in rear view, respectively. , So that the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the distribution of the game balls can be removed.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, When the game balls are further dispensed from the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball exit 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 at the upstream of the full tank 773 is also full, game balls flow to the full tank passage 775 through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770 From the full tank outlet 776 to the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 5 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 4b.

  Then, when the inside of the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 becomes full of game balls, the game balls cannot come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and have stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and many game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the stored pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) stops paying out game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and plays the game. The user is notified of urging the player to discharge the game balls in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is performed. The detection is not performed, and the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 54A is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54B is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 57 (A) is a plan view of the anti-fraud member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the anti-fraud member, and (C) is a perspective view of the anti-fraud member as viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hit ball launching device 650 one by one, and can also play the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110, and are fed in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, a rear end of the front cover 581 closed, and a front opened. A rear cover 582 having a hit box supply port 582a for supplying a game ball which has a box shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction and penetrates from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball firing device 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover 581, which is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and partitions the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b behind the front cover 581. a, and the game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feeding member 584 is rotatably supported around the axis. The ball feeding solenoid 585 rotates the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, a ball feed member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and a ball punching member 583 is provided on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and a ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the right side thereof. Are located.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a later-described ball removing member 583 extends forward from 581c. The front cover 581 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper bowl removing base 344. It is formed so as to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a below the entrance 581a and between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b, the upper surface of which is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584, and a partition 583a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bent in a U-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. Of the rotating rod 583b rotatably supported by the rotating rod 583c, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 583b, and a rotating rod 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110. The upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper dish removing slider 343 in the upper dish removing mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is contacted via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. The ball holder 584b includes an arc-shaped concave portion from the rear end toward the rotation axis side, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the spherical holder 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 to move the rod 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis in the left-right direction. ing.

  The ball feeding member 584 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a and a ball holding portion 584b in a direction communicating with the hit ball supply port 582a, and a ball holding portion 584b in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate between a holding position that is oriented. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650, and enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball to the ball holding unit 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking unit 584a, and the ball stays on the partition unit 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partitioning portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the rod portion 584c side closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  The ball feed unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed action rod 586 which swings up and down. And a ball-feeding crank 587 that rotates about the axis extending in the vertical direction and rotates the ball-feeding member 584 about the axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extending in the left-right direction, and a side of the engagement part 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. A shaft 587b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582; a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b; And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in FIG.

  The ball feed unit 580 of the present example transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587, so that a ball feed member is provided. 584 can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operation rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 585 and the tip that swings is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise in front view by the weight portion 583c. When the operating rod 583c protruding forward abuts on the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper tray ball removing slider 343 in the upper bowl removing mechanism 340 of the tray unit 300, the rotation thereof is restricted. In normal times, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that game balls do not enter the ball outlet 581b. Then, when the player presses down the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300, the upper tray ball removing slider 343 slides down together with the contact piece 343a to make contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  As described above, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the abutting piece 343a of the upper bowl removing mechanism 340, the bowl removing member 583 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the entrance is formed by the partition 583a. The partition between the ball opening 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered through the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball discharging channel 344c of the upper plate ball discharging base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 contacts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is supplied vigorously onto the partition portion 581a. In addition, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, so that the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be prevented from being damaged. The partition 583a can be prevented from bouncing off.

  In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56 (B) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582 is formed. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582 a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the entirety of the anti-fraud member 588 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided at the dividing line 588a extending toward the base end (right side) as a boundary, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c are mutually separated. A V-shape formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b away from the vertical direction (rearward) with respect to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588. And a slope 588e formed at the tip of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c and inclined toward the cut 588d.

  As shown in the figure, as shown in the figure, the cutting portion 588d is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b so that the distal end (left end in rear view) of the upper piece 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V-shape in plan view, and a wire Iw attached to an incorrect game ball I is inserted into the V-shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become. In the ball feed unit 580 of the present example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582. Are formed in a form that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the same time as the part where is formed, and communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the illegal game ball I is transferred by the hit ball launch device 650 to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the ball 1100 into the inside, the illegal game ball I fired by the ball shooting device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the shooting rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Through the game area 1100. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire Iw is different from the movement locus of the illegal game ball I, Within the route within the shortest distance. Accordingly, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball firing device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a so as to move on the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to a portion extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a (inside the mounting concave portion 582b) is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 disposed at that position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled rightward in rear view by the momentum of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal game ball I in the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in front view). In this state, the wire Iw is cut by the friction or shearing force applied by the cutting portion 588d (see FIG. 57 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is attenuated due to friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, the fraud between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 does not enter the game area 1100. Will be discharged through

  Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, so that an illegal act is performed on the illegal game ball I attached to the wire rod Iw in the game area 605. Can be prevented. Even if the illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588 as described above, so that the illegal operation cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw cuts into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, so that it is possible to prevent fraud.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 so that the player can handle the ball. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 by driving the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580, and the hitting ball launching device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, thereby causing the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to play. The game is played in the game area 1100 which can be visually recognized through the door frame, so that the player can be entertained and a feed mechanism (a ball feed member 584 or a ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 provided with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are used. The ball sending member 584 and the hitting ball launching device 650 are also as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. The number of game balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bad and to prevent the player's interest from lowering.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game balls can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, or to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled with the game balls at an early stage. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player by reducing the annoyance of the player, and to reduce the interest of the player, and to reduce the size of the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  In addition, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are compared with a separate ball feeding member 583. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a problem occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583. However, by replacing the ball feed unit 580, the problem can be easily solved.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side, so There is no need to configure a transmission mechanism (upper plate ball removal mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable and closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration relating to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened is compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side. By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism is worn out early and malfunction or breakage, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580 and the like can be avoided. And durability can be improved.

  In addition, since the upper plate ball release button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 Of the game ball from the player can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the operation of removing the ball in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball release button 341.

  In addition, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-pulling member 583 is made to move by the movement of the ball-pulling-out slider 343 that slides up and down in response to the operation of the ball-pulling-out button 341. The partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal moving range of the slider 343 and the partition 583a in the horizontal direction can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the slider 343 is pushed upward, and the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the ball supply port 582a when the slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member) 583) can be improved in durability. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper bowl removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, it is difficult to repel the game ball. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 or the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

  Further, since the partition 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition 583a is related to the case where the partition 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper bowl button 341, and the moving range of the partition 583 a can be reduced in planar projection, and the same as above. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  Further, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are communicated with each other, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper plate removing mechanism 340, the partition 583a may be used. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other, and the game ball in the upper plate 301 is hit even though the upper plate ball release button 341 is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player side without being sent to the device 650 side, it is possible to make the player recognize that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem. It is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by moving.

  Further, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the bent rotating rod portion 583b, when a game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is bent and the rotating rod portion is bent. By dispersing by the 583b or absorbing by bending of the rotating rod 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being transmitted linearly to the rotating shaft, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game balls in the upper plate 301, the left and right of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 are set. The movement in the direction can be minimized, and the play of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be improved so that the game balls can be discharged well. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be made as short as possible. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball firing device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the state of the highest speed (with momentum) immediately after being fired by the hit ball firing device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d By rapidly (strongly) pulling the wire Iw, the wire Iw can be surely cut, and at the same time, the momentum of the unauthorized game ball I is attenuated to prevent the illegal ball Iw from entering the game area 1100. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the illegal game ball I from performing an illegal act.

  Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end face of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the tamper-proof member 588 can cause injury to the worker during assembly or the like. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward across the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate. Thus, since the V-shaped cut portion 588d is formed, the cut portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has a unit frame 592 of a vertically long octagonal shape formed of synthetic resin and two sheets for closing front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stoppers 592a disposed at the upper portions on both left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement member extending in the left and right direction along the lower end and extending downward. A stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage from the upper rear with the vertically bent protruding piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame is locked. It is configured to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Shaped decoration in door frames]
Next, the molding decoration, that is, the shape decoration in the door frame 5, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. As shown, the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically elliptical game window 101. For driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in a front view. The handle device 500 is arranged. In the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the gaming window 101, and surround the lower side of the gaming window 101. Dish unit 300 is arranged as described above.

  The outer appearance of the door frame 5 is greatly different on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has an appearance of a natural rock-like feeling rugged by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decorative unit 200. On the other hand, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 seen on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240 provide a metallic appearance with a sharp and artificial feel. ing.

  58, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 differ in the amount of forward projection, and the right side decoration unit 200 has a left side decoration unit as shown in FIG. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed to have a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed to have a slightly curved flat shape.

  Accordingly, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 look similar to each other. When viewed from the right side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and the illusion of a pachinko machine of a different model can be provided. , And the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in an island facility or the like of a game hall, the exterior of the entire island facility is solid and solid. The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having different forms are alternately arranged to give a rhythmical impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). This makes it possible to increase the appeal of the player and strongly attract the interest of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 emits an LED mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc., provided in the units 200, 240, 280, 300, thereby emitting the gaming window 101. Can be illuminated with an arbitrary luminescent color so as to surround. Also, of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b disposed behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off, so that the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the gaming window 101 can be changed.

[1-2L. Light-emitting decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of the units 200, 240, 280, and 300 includes decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. Can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except for the lower side of the game window 101, and the plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250 are formed. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the lower center of the gaming window 101 in the left-right center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to the lens.

  In the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. Is formed by one smooth and gentle curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

  Further, the door frame 5 is provided at the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, on the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left lower decorative substrate 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, right side lower decorative substrate 216, left side upper decorative substrate 254, and left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are disposed at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are disposed at positions corresponding to the emission lens units 210b and 250b (side flash lenses 204 and 246). . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens units 210a and 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the radiation lens units 210b and 250b have relatively high luminance. It is an LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper right side decorative board 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower side left decorative substrate 256 are made of white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, and the like. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit, light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating the appearance, and to reflect light emitted from the LEDs 210a and 210b and the like to the player side by the substrate, so that The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated with light.

  As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects the ends of the upper portions of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer portion outside the central annular lens portion 282b. , And four extension frame lens portions 282c. The extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294 on the front surface.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed behind the central annular lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and a laterally extending upper lens 282 extending from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the extension frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288. The upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b And can be separately illuminated. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front side of the upper side decorative substrate 290, so that each extension frame lens portion 282c can be individually illuminated. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, and has an external appearance that is continuous with the external appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In the dish unit 300, an upper dish decorative board 322 is disposed behind the upper dish front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decorative board 322 allow the upper plate front decorative member 316 to be mounted. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper plate ball removal button 341 can be illuminated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative board 322 is a full-color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation unit 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are arranged below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 includes a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. The button decoration board 432 is provided with one LED 432d corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. The surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, it corresponds to each peripheral lens part 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 which covers the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. The LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a include a first annular group 102 (within a hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) near the gaming window 101 and a second annular group 103 disposed outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so that they are substantially concentric so as to surround the gaming window 101. A plurality (two in this example) of light emitting decorations can be made. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the area of the hatch near the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated annularly, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are turned on. When all light is emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the gaming window 101 is decoratively illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (FIGS. 59 and 60) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. (Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the upper right side decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is a notification group 105. Various information can be notified to a player or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282 b of the upper decoration unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the gaming window 101 are formed by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is formed as an upper central group 106 that emits light at the upper center. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated. It is possible to make a luminous decoration that becomes a point. The LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 for emitting and illuminating the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. The boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated by appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged below the game window 101 makes the upper plate 301 emit light. The dish group 108 is provided. In the door frame 5, LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the game window 101 and at the center of the upper part of the plate unit 300, operate the operation unit 400. An operation unit group 109 for performing light emission decoration is provided. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be illuminated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be notified.

  The light emitting decoration of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong, corresponding to the control systems. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided with 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each peripheral lens unit 210a, 250a of the side lens 210, 250. Have been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens units 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems of an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems: a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. Also, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in front and rear and left and right. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a set of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems, one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, the number of systems is tripled to 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-luminance white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. The two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

  Note that the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b constituted by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, and therefore, the number of the systems is the same as that in the actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems under the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting and blinking are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . This makes it possible to perform an expressive light emission effect.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequentially in the same color or a similar color) to spread outward around the gaming window 101. A light emission effect, or conversely, a light emission effect such that light is converged from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light (same color or similar color sequentially) from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102, Alternatively, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 emit light at the same time, so that a light emission effect or the like can be performed such that the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 near the gaming window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light-emitting effect, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to make the player entertain and entertain. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the respective systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j emit light as appropriate, so that the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101 is formed. Light emission can be performed such that light moves toward the center lens 284 or light moves from the upper center lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (divided into ten) into ten systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about eight systems (approximately eight divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emission effect in which light orbits the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, and simultaneously with the radial group 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 emit light. The light emitting effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly by causing the light emitting group 101 to emit light, or the radial group 104 emitting light (lighting / flashing) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103. Or a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration of the hologram. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens units 210b and 250b) orbit can be performed.

  In addition, the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, so that a chance is given to the player or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probable change game state, a time saving game state, a probable change time short game state). , Etc.) can be performed.

  Further, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301 is performed, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation For example, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the unit 405 can be provided. In addition, by appropriately emitting light from the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect for prompting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guiding the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform a light-emission effect in which a gradation such as a light-emission color or brightness is different for each of the 109 or each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame. FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is supported on the left side of the outer frame 2 in a front view, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 behind the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by a door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5 from the front side.

  The main body frame 3 according to the present embodiment forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support 630 and a lower shaft support 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, respectively; A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 and pays out game balls to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600. Ball unit 700 for mounting and blocking the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and is attached to the front of the body frame base 600. Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and various control boards for controlling electric components provided on the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. , A back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the body frame base in the body frame. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear of the main frame base 600, the main frame base 600 is laid face down. In addition, the rear surface of the body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D of the body frame base 600, so that the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted, and the workability related to the assembly of the body frame 3 is improved. Can be better.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within about 3/4 of the entire area from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side when viewed from the front, Frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door frame, an upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward from the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and an open side protruding rearward from the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engagement groove 603 into which the outer bent protruding piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 and spreads in a left-right direction in a plate-like lower rear wall portion. 604; The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 has a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 that projects upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and a game board of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the front. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape that is suspended downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main frame base 600 is fitted to the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the backward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate that the right side of the game board 4 in the front view is moved in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. I have. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement of the side security plate 950 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a metal fitting for mounting the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 on the rear surface of the free end (upper left and right ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. A part 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending up and down and left and right, and is capable of mounting the upper shaft supporting member 630 and the lower shaft supporting member 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. The main body frame base 600 has a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and a door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base main body 110, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front. And a solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example has the lower rear wall portion 604 formed at a position one step lower than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the lower rear wall portion 604 has a right side in front view. On the front surface, the hitting ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the hit ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. A fale space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right centers of the lower rear wall portion 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the openings 614 and on both left and right sides in a front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692 to pass through the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. Note that the through holes 615 arranged on both left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion rotatably supporting a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 to the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture supporter 616 when viewed from the front and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis supported by the fixing tool supporting portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a protrudes above the game board placing portion 606, and is inserted into the fixing recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts on the stopper 617, and the abutment with the stopper 617 restricts the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. Has become.

  Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that penetrate vertically (in the front-rear direction) inwardly (in the axial support side) from the engagement grooves 603 on the right side (open side) in the front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock hole 621 penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and arranged side by side in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed near the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially at the center in the vertical direction. The locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged with the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the locking holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in FIG. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620, and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is also formed. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and obliquely descends from the upper right side toward the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then lowers the lower rear wall portion 604 at the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a main frame base ball passage 622 from which the game balls can flow down from the middle in the up-down direction to a slightly upward position. The rear side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 is closed by the substrate unit base 810 of the substrate unit 800. Although details will be described later, game balls flowing through the ball passage 741d of the prize ball device 740 are used for the game balls. It is being distributed.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in rear view, and the back cover shaft support portions 623 rotatably support the support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front left side of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the lock device 1000 on the right side (opening side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 of the main body frame 3 are respectively mounted to the metal mount mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 in a front view using predetermined screws, so that the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and an axial pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. And a door frame support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction into which the door frame 5 is inserted. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for regulating the end. In the upper bracket 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 640 includes a door frame support 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a body frame 3 that is disposed below the door frame support 642 and supports the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main frame support 644. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and a front extending portion. And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the front view 642a when viewed from the front and regulates the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame shaft support 642, a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main frame support 644 of the lower support 640 is attached to a metal mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in a vertical and horizontal direction. A front extension portion 644b extending forward, and a main frame support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. In the main frame supporting member 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In this example, the lower bracket 640 is configured such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft mounting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the body frame shaft mounting 644 overlap (contact) with each other in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. With the front extension 642b of the shaft bracket 642 and the front extension 644b of the body frame shaft bracket 644 separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, it is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the body frame base 600. It has become.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the shaft support pins 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the body frame shaft support holes (not shown) of the lower shaft support 640. Are positioned coaxially. The main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main frame support 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support 21, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  When the upper bracket 630 and the lower bracket 640 are attached to the main frame base 600, the door frame shaft support holes 634 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft bracket 640 are provided. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially with the door, so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. After placing the lower shaft support 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension 642 b of the door frame support 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 can be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the up-down direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door is slid downward so that the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support 630 overlap vertically, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to allow the door to slide. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball firing device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hit ball firing device in the main body frame. The hitting ball firing device 650 can hit a game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to a rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment has a launching base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654 a protruding forward from the lower rear surface of the launching base 652. Launching solenoid 654, a hitting hammer 656 fixed to the driving shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting hammer 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658. A tip of a ball hitting hammer 656 between a firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left and a front end of the firing base 652 attached to the front of the firing base 652, and a firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stop that forms a gap through which a game ball cannot pass at the same time that the game ball 658 is allowed to pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 The pin 662 and the ball stopper 662 regulate the rotation of the hitting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which a game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit. And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting hammer 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gently extending arc extending from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664 are provided. ing. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 is rotated toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  Further, the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed in a loose arc shape having a downwardly concave lower portion substantially along the extension of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped concave shape, so that a game ball hit by the ball hammer 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting ball firing device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a rotation end of the hitting hammer 656 toward the hitting position side, and a rotation of the hitting hammer 656 at a position away from the hitting position. A stopper 668 for regulating an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber so as to be able to absorb the impact when the hitting hammer 656 abuts and to suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. You can do it.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, when the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launching rail 660 is lower at the approximate center in the left-right direction. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board placement section 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601). A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and a downwardly widened predetermined width in the left-right direction. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660, and drives the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Is available. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the gaming area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into the ball but falls into a foul ball falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. Is driven in synchronism with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven. Is released (OFF), the ball sending member 584 sends the received game ball to the hitting ball firing device 650 side, so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously with the ball feeding solenoid 585. By performing (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting hammer 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit in an exploded view from behind. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and viewed later. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then issues a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island facility side. A tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching a game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof on the rear surface thereof and for fastening the back cover 900 to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a as viewed from the rear. And a rear cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L-shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. Along with the arrangement, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. An external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding opening 601 in a front view, as shown in the figure. And are integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends substantially rearward along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends substantially inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a at a predetermined width. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, so that when mounted on the main body frame base 600, it is possible to form a space in which the game board 4 can be stored. ing.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate disposed next to the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the lower rear side of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the prize ball device, a prize ball passage 715 that guides a game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall. And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full branch unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 has an escape hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 or the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and a back hole 717. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted in the prize ball base 710, mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., and the main frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  76, the prize ball tank 720 of the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open top as shown in FIG. 76, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and protrudes rearwardly from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only in a right rear portion (opening rear portion) in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right side rear wall 721 protruding rearward from the bottom wall 721 and opening downward, and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) of the discharge port 723 in plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Eaves 724, a bar-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in plan view, and prize balls formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. Tank 720 on prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the winning balls tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described below, and can level and align game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially half of the upper side of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from overflowing from inside the tank rail unit 730, It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view becomes lower toward the right side. In a plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, the occurrence of clogging of the ball in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and at the same time, from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. Gaming balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open top and a width (depth) in which game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so that is lower. The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (axial support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and a front lower surface. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) projecting further downward and locked from above from the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710.

  This tank rail 731 has a right end (open side) end in front view located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and plays the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and transferred from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the prize ball base 710 by locking the locking projection 731 c of the tank rail 731 with the attachment locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to an alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the alignment gear 732, and a right end of the gear cover 733 in a front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper piece that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731 a. 735, and an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 so as to be able to contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which a ball stopper 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in a vertical direction and through which a protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. I can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that were not at one level by the ball leveling member 727 at one level, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

  The alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery as shown in the figure, and is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by a half pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the downstream outlet 732 while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately one by one. It is sent to the device 740.

  In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically, so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls down from the narrow groove. Has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is externally grounded via a grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via a grounding metal 782, though not shown in detail. When the game ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and causes the protruding piece 735a of the ball stopper 735 to pass through the slit 734a into the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding pieces 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. I have.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Things. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 mounted on the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710 as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 has a supply path which is open at the upper end on the rear side and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction at a width slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and communicating with a lower end (open side) of the distribution space 741b on the rear side on the rear side and bent in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (axial support side) in rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end are provided. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball ejection passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter length in the vertical direction than the unit base 741, and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743, and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744 a projects rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotating shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744. A first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 and supported by the unit base 741, and meshed with the second gear 746 A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and a payout cycle which rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and have a plurality (three in this example) of detecting slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a ball cutout switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and flowing in the prize ball passage 741c. , A rotation angle sensor 752 that detects a detection slit 749a of a rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotator 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball cutout switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. Have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection board 749). ), A gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply path ground that can contact a game ball flowing in the supply path 741a of the unit base 741. A metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and a grounding connection for the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 detachably supported on the unit base 741. And a detach button 759.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back lid 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball-extraction passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a shape in which a position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, and can relieve the momentum of the game balls discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730. I can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 is partially cut out on one side (left side in rear view) below a position of the supply passage 741a that swells rearward, and is outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball cutout switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear side penetrating below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By mounting the cut-out switch 750 on the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the cut-out switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence / absence of a playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball-out switch 750. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball-out switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is to be notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting part 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. And a button support hole 741j which is provided on the unit base 741 and supports a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742. Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 can be brought into contact with game balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage grounding metal 757 to the grounding metal mounting portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal 757 is in contact with the rear end of the lower end of the U-shaped grounding metal 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply passage 741 a via the supply passage grounding metal 757 is removed. Is available.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and an upper end bulging rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting part 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and an relay board mounting on the upper part of the back cover 742. The sensor board mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b to mount the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the grounding metal mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  In this example, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is made of an aluminum plate and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is removed. Heat can be easily dissipated.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three concave portions 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. As the 748 rotates, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. In addition, three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the positions between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example is configured such that a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit, and the like are input to the payout control board 4110, and the payout motor 744 is operated by operating the ball removal switch 860b. Is rotated so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gears rotates. A payout rotator 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detection board 749 is fixed to the rear side thereof so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotator 748 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted by the counting sensor 751 one by one and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated clockwise in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side. The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d by the ball removal passage 741d from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770 described later, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, the board unit The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the rear outside via the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Even when the unit base 741 is assembled to the main frame 3, the prize can be received from the front side of the main frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball ejection passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as clogged balls can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to an upper portion in the front-rear direction at a substantially upper portion of the center of the prize ball base 710 and is fixed to an attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 and at a rear upper portion of the lower portion of the lower portion of the prize ball base 710. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the fixed portion 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  As shown in the figure, the full-branch branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end toward the front end, and is opened upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving game balls flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward to front the front end. A normal ball exit 774 opened at the right end of the view, and a full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball forward from a position farther to the right in rear view than immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper portion in front view and receives a game ball flowing down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received by the ejection port 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball exit 774 and a normal ball exit 774 are provided at the left end in front view. And a ball ejection port 779 opened at a position behind the full tank exit 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first cover of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is connected to the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face and communicate with each other. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball ejection passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game ball discharged from the ball ejection port 779 is used for the body frame base 600. Is transferred to the main frame base base passage 622.

  In the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes from the first ball outlet 544a onto the plate unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game ball that cannot be moved out of the upper plate 301 from the 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving in the branch space 772 in the horizontal direction and moves in the horizontal direction. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, under the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  It should be noted that the full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily detect foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full-filled branch unit 770 and the occurrence of clogging without disassembling the full-filled branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of the present example automatically converts the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full game balls are released. The lower plate 302 can be supplied to the lower plate 302, so that the upper plate becomes full and the ball release button on the upper plate is operated as in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball firing device. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, to eliminate the troublesomeness during the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Also, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game balls to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls stayed in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit by the ball launching device. By 650, the game ball can be directly driven, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. In other words, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be. Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided, and the wide gaming area 1100 can entertain the player.

  Further, since the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish so that the receiving port (first ball inlet) Even when there is only one 542a and the second ball entrance 542c), a game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls (the full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope with the change without changing the main body frame 3. The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, game balls sent from the normal ball exit 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray is provided. Even if the game ball is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes. .

  As long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, thereby suppressing the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage dish, The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a or the like can be set at the same height as the first ball inlet 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage dishes. It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls by making the storage dish deep, so that the player can play the game without worrying about the amount of storage frequently. Can be performed, and the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, thereby increasing the cost of changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be ejected from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. As a result, the substantial storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage dish is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage dish is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball exit 774 or the full ball exit 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is located as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage plate can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full branch unit 770). The number of pachinko machines 1 can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  The normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a width that allows game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the remaining amount (reserved amount) of game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is reduced. Since it is possible to increase the number, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount including the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from being reduced even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different. The pachinko machine 1 can correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, game balls are clogged in the full tank branch unit 770, causing a problem. In this case, the location of the clogged ball can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and the malfunction can be eliminated at an early stage, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is mounted on a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. Of the game ball can be cut off.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 in a front view so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held vertically slidably by a shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for vertically sliding the opening / closing shutter 792, and an opening / closing shutter 792 ascending via the opening / closing crank 793. And an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the opening / closing spring.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in a front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed on a front surface of a left end portion in a front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in a front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper left portion from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which project from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide grooves 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank supporting portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view. A drive rod 793b extending outward to the right and extending to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and is slidably inserted into a drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 projecting rearward from the distal end of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a lower front view and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of an opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface in the middle of the drive rod 793b. ), And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The normal sphere exit 774 and the full sphere exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example is configured such that the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates vertically in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 about an axis extending in the front-back direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c The opening / closing shutter 792 slides up and down via the drive hole 792b into which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

  In this way, in response to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are automatically set by the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front by disassembly. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after exploded. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit taken apart and viewed from the front. FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 89 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear face of the board unit base 810 when viewed from the front, and a board unit base 810. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the power supply board 810, a power supply box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the power supply box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply box box 850 and the speaker box 820. And payout control board box A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the 860 in a front view, and a main relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. Have.

  As shown, the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example is formed to extend long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped down one step and gradually gently inclines toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 in front view. A plurality of vertically elongated slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface and the cylindrical duct portion 814 penetrating therethrough. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main frame base baseball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game balls can be prevented from falling down from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-back direction. You can do it.

  In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In a state where the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are mounted on the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are positioned on the front side through the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It has come to face. The board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing section 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing section 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box housing section 816 and the front box housing section 843 Thus, an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is provided with a speaker 821 which is literally attached to the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with a space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinthine passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and leading the front side. And a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deeper sound with respect to the caliber of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well to the front. ing.

  The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The launch power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launch power supply board 831, and receives heat from electronic components and the like through slits 830 a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above into a storage recess opened upward formed by a box storage portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and a front box storage portion 843 of a power supply board box holder 840 described below. It is to be accommodated as possible. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a failure occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. , And the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the hit ball firing device 650 to be driven. In the firing power supply board box 830, slits 830a as heat radiation holes are formed on upper and lower surfaces of the firing power supply board 831 to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the firing power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b for dividing the internal space into two spaces, that is, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is formed integrally from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect to the inner wall of the lower surface. Thus, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 to close the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is accommodated by the partition wall 830b to accommodate the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b is provided with a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , And a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being released to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored. Therefore, heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. The heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is radiated to the heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively, which communicate the housing space 830d and the outside air. By releasing the heat to the outside through the slit 830a, it is possible to prevent this released heat from entering the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the firing power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the state in which the firing power supply board 831 is still attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, the entire firing power supply board box 830 can be replaced.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its end of life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is easy. The interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates early due to repeated charging / discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute, every time when the driving solenoid is fired by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from an AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but does not repeatedly charge and discharge the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Therefore, its life is extremely long as compared with the launch power supply board 831. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 has a relatively early life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 has a long life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851, so that the lifetime is improved. Electronic components associated with long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electronic component from being replaced with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to the long-life aging.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed in order to change the hitting characteristics. In order to attach or detach the firing power supply board 831, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601, and it is difficult to replace the firing power board 831. In this way, it is possible to prevent fraud that deliberately changes the optimized driving strength of the firing power supply board 831 that has been fraudulently modified, and to suppress fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who has been frustrated or the like from developing into a fraud such as a fraud.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is tampered with, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the tampering is performed. It is possible to shorten the period of interruption of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the frustration and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 for controlling the hit ball firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the hitting characteristics, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball firing device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be changed to a new game. It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, the driving characteristics of the game balls can be easily adjusted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game using the new game board 4 can be sufficiently enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player is suppressed. can do.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 of the firing control unit 4120 is detachable from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 with respect to an island facility such as a game hall when replacing the firing power supply board 831. The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall can be prevented from increasing. In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is replaced. Can be reduced, and the burden on the hall and the like can be reduced.

  Further, when changing the model or the like, only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the body frame 3 and the like can be used as they are, so that the fire control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. Replacement can solve the problem, shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and eliminate the frustration and disappointment due to the interruption of the game as soon as possible It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the launch power supply board 831 (the launch power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In order to detach the firing power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing wrongdoing enters through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the game board 4 causes the unauthorized tool to reach the firing power supply board 831. Can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the launch power supply board 831 from being tampered with, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against tampering.

  Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding opening 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3; A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described operation and effect can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (the firing power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the trouble can be eliminated early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

  In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 has a discharge ball receiver that receives a game ball that is opened upward and is discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the front left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Part 841, a discharge passage 842 for guiding the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharging the same, and a front side and a front (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. A front box receiving portion 843 which is opened upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and a front end of the power supply substrate box 850 which is formed such that the entire rear surface of the power supply box holder 840 is depressed forward. And a rear box storage portion 844.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It flows through the body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810, and the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game balls that have flowed down and the game balls that have been discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, which will be described in detail later, are passed through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged to

  Also, the power supply board box holder 840 has a front box storage portion 843 formed at a position corresponding to the box storage portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810. An accommodation recess for accommodating the box 830 can be formed.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 includes a vertical wall protruding rearward along a lower side of an opening facing a rear side of a power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to a lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 which is disposed on the front side and below the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms an appropriate gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece are provided. Is locked so that the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has the upright wall portion 850b connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 and the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854, and is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, a connector is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the vertical wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal from which the wiring cord is extended is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed against the terminal, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) faces the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when the connector 855 is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to be wrapped around (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Moreover, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c that protrude rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall 850b, the rear end of the rear wall 850b is not moved. The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring code 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring code 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is moved from the standing wall portion 850b. Can be made hard to come off, and the wiring code 854 can be immediately turned to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring code 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. Can be performed, and the work process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. , The rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, after the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 facing the opening of the power substrate box 850 covering the power substrate 851, the connector is formed by the upright wall 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal to which the connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. 853 can be actuated in such a direction as to cancel the connection with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

  Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the wiring cord 854 can be bent more loosely than when there is no vertical wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the wiring cord 854 is disconnected due to an excessive force.

  Further, an upright wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853. Since the upright wall portion 850b is located at a position adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and cannot be forced. It is possible to prevent a strong force from acting, and to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

  In addition, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the upright wall 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the upright wall 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, and the like that may cause a problem from attaching to the power supply board 851, and to mount the power supply board 851 on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (e.g., resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) that are difficult to touch or replace, thereby increasing the defense against fraud. Has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal 855 is mounted on the power supply board 851 with respect to the power supply terminal 853. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. Of the power supply terminal 853 from the power supply substrate 851 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 in which a failure hardly occurs can be provided.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claws and the locking pieces, the wiring code 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring code 854 is formed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 via the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power terminal 853 can be prevented from being released, and the connector can be prevented. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent a problem such as a contact failure or a conduction failure from occurring.

  Also, since the rear end of the rear end of the power supply board box 850 where the wiring code 854 is folded back is provided with the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the vertical wall 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 which prevents the above and reliably achieves the above-described operation and effect can be embodied.

  In addition, the wiring guide 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall 850b to be moved toward the standing wall 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall 850b. Thus, the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved, and the wiring code 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and immediately the wiring code 854 is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. This makes it possible to perform a series of operations continuously, thereby simplifying the operation steps related to assembly and suppressing an increase in cost.

  The dispensing control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, and a thin box-shaped cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear and is open at the front. 862, and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. The dispensing control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened and closed improperly. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the dispensing control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the dispensing control board 4110 face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. The board base 871 has a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 which is mounted on the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 from the rear side and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening 873b extending from the rear wall 873a in the vertical direction and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are mounted on the rear surface. Unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to a frequency display for displaying the operation state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are provided with external peripheral panel relay terminal boards 872 and CR unit connection terminals from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. Also, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of an error code displayed on a frequency indicator, a CR unit or the like installed on the island facility side is displayed. The attached state display seal 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed at the upper inside of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown). A locking claw 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871i. ing.

  Further, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape opened to the rear side, and the inner circumference thereof is large enough to insert the outer circumference of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The inner peripheral wall is an outer piece 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends in a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover attaching section 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protruding ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the board cover mounting portion 871b as viewed from the rear and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The projecting ridge 871e of the board base 871 is in such a state that the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece 871c and, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the right rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b at a rear surface on the right side as viewed in the vertical direction, and is separated from each other in the up-down direction to pivotally support the substrate box cover 875. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h that is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into the board cover attachment section 871b surrounded by the outer piece 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b. An inner wall portion 873d extending forward from 873a (toward the substrate base 871), and a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed on the 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed at the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a board base 871 extending outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. And a pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-shaped engaging member formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with a front side opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. The connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the board base 871 and then locks the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the board base 871 to thereby fix the board. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and a CR unit installed on the island facility side of the game hall on its front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball lending unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. I have.

  The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and entirely open to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, through holes 875b corresponding to the opening portions 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through holes 875b. And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 is capable of opening and closing the rear surface of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shafts 875a on the bearings 871g of the board base 871. I have. The board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c closer to the shaft portion 875a (a shaft-supported side) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall farther from the shaft portion 875a. 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective impact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear faces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example, when assembled, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact walls 875c are present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegitimately flexible tool into the boundary (boundary) between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be surely prevented, and illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

  Further, in this terminal board box 870, the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, so that the CR unit mounted as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be prevented. It has become.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871, on the shaft portion 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces. An impact wall 875c having a length extending between them is provided. Since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it more difficult to perform wrongdoing and reducing the deterrent. It can be expensive.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector will be performed. In this case, the insertion of the electrodes can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875, and illegal acts on the internal connection terminals 874b can be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so that the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are mounted. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the gap or the like and the tip of the illegal tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  In a state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are arranged in a direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusions 871e and the outer piece 871c of the base 871 are arranged along the rear surface (the surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate. Since the collision wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an attempt is made to allow an illegal and highly flexible tool to enter between (boundary) between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. Also, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent the intrusion of an unauthorized tool from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is provided. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can surely prevent the wrongdoing of the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Also, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is made to contact the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate and the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the use of the D-sub connector, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent illegal acts.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear face of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear face of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like impact wall 875c extending forward from the axially supported side end of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the improper tool is connected by the contact wall 875c. It can be prevented from reaching the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side, thereby preventing improper conduct. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then open the connection terminal plate cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Deterrence against fraudulent acts. Further, the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c. Therefore, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 can be formed. Can be prevented from being distorted, and the formation of a gap can be prevented.

  Further, even if an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be performed, The rear side of the opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875, so that the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-like electrode cannot be inserted into the gap of the connector main body from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent improper conduct from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and to have a high crime prevention ability. It can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends forward from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform a wrongdoing, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is formed on the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from outside the terminal board box 870 without disassembling. Whether an incorrect tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, or the like housed inside, or whether the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like itself has been replaced with an incorrect one. Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like have been replaced with unauthorized ones. In addition, it is easy to detect wrongdoing, and it is easy to detect wrongdoing. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 so that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces in the rear direction, the terminal frame box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal board box 870 are oriented to the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are connected to a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and a door frame. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in the device 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. Each of the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 has a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed to the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are so arranged that their front sides are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The main relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, and a rotation position detecting sensor of the handle device 500 in the plate unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, a touch sensor 516, a firing stop switch 518, and a connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is provided with the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288 provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400. , 290, 322, 430, 432, and the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided in the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. It is for relaying.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of the present example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the back side of the game board holding opening 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes a rear opening of the game board holding opening 601, a side 904 that extends forward from a right side of the main body 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction, project downward, and are supported by the back cover support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and prize balls formed respectively on the upper left and lower left sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 is provided near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening the opening 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 is a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in the rear view of the lower engagement piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically-long rectangular locking port 922 which is disposed at a predetermined distance to the left in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking section which is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and a main body 902 which is inserted through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. It includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin, and is easily bent.

  Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking pieces 923a of the guide member 923 are loosely locked to the locking openings 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It can be idle. In addition, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state where the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 of the fastening member 924 protruding forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by supporting the pivot pin 906 on the rear cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. The closed state can be achieved by engaging the engaging pieces 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage cover 780. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 substantially coincide with each other.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the distal end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

  Then, from this state, by inserting the distal end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by one fastening mechanism 920, so that the fastening or fastening can be easily performed only by operating one fastening member 924. It can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve maintainability.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape above the connection notch 910 in front view. 912, and a check notch 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 and the like. Faces the rear side. The back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the confirmation opening 912 facing the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to check the operation, the appearance, and the management state of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portions 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is transmitted to the main body frame 3 (the pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined positions in the left-right direction that are wide and extend vertically in the left-right direction at a position slightly to the left from the center when viewed from the front. These through holes 918 are provided after the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is stored and held in the main body frame 3. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the side, so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through-hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through-hole 918.

  Thereby, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held on the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held on the main body frame 3 and the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance and the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is still the guide member 923. Through the back cover 900 to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left inside the pachinko machine 1. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from dropping from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 having been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , Can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, so that maintenance can be easily performed.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924a is surely positioned in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the security effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 movably with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the guide member 923 and the holding member 925, so that the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap between the guide member 923 and the elongated hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member 925 is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back of the main body frame 3. At the time of fastening to the cover fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. As a result, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts on the projecting portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, thereby reducing the occurrence of trouble. And can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion to be screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, compared to the engagement by a simple locking claw, the fastening can be achieved by just pulling. Cannot be released, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the security effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent to illegal acts can be provided.

  Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (the insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw portion 924 straight in the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to an axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening is provided. Since the guide member 923 is elastically locked to the shaft 922, the distal end side (the long hole 923 b side) of the guide member 923 movably attached to the guide member 923 extends in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923 a can be pivotally moved around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be supported by the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 or the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided. By engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is performed. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible using only one fastening member 924, and operations such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement pieces 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a favorable state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by supporting the back support pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover supporting portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, simply turning the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding opening 601 in the main body frame 3 and fastening the back cover 900 with the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the main body frame 3. The holes 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening members 924 held on the back cover 900 through the insertion holes 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the body frame 3, even when the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be kept in a state of being supported by the main body frame 3, and there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, thereby simplifying the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. As shown, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U-shape in plan view, a mounting bracket 954 fixed vertically up and down near the inner front end of the main body 952, and mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 has a length substantially equal to the height of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the up-down direction and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side in front view from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b and projecting less than the front end piece 952b, and a front end from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending to the right in a direction longer than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and a front component 1110 of the game board 4 is provided between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side of the game panel 1150 in front view is inserted (see FIG. 108).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is mounted on the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952 d of the main body 952 is mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the side security plate 950 is configured so that the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166 to prevent insertion of a tool for performing wrongdoing between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 108). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged at right angles to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. Of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (penetrated) into the substantially U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150, and the front end piece 952b is connected to the U-shaped projecting piece. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched between the protruding pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door support 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. This makes it possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. That the door frame 5 is opened against the body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the gap between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is provided. The strength and rigidity of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, and the side security plate 950 for supporting the door frame 5 (supporting side) is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is connected to the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one point between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. And the door cover 5 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) and the main body frame 3 are locked by the three hook portions 1041 for the door frame. Even if the open side is scooped by an unauthorized tool such as a bur, the spread between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be prevented well, and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being forcibly opened. it can.

  Further, the rear end of the side plate piece 952a of the side security plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side plate piece 952a in the front-rear direction becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the entire side security plate 950 can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the side security plate 950 from being forcibly bent and fraudulent. .

  Further, since the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extruded die, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It is possible to suppress the increase in cost even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and to reduce defects such as a decrease in strength generated at the time of processing as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The side security plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and have high durability and strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a slide rod for a door frame and a slide rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the lock device. (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device when disassembled and viewed from behind, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding rod for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. A door hook hole 620 formed on the upper right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 and a lock hole 621 formed on the lower portion; and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. And a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. A sliding rod 1040, a main frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and a U-shaped sliding rod 1050 so that the sliding of the main frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally performed. A first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are provided below the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and has therein a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame. Are slidably arranged. It should be noted that the U-shaped base 1001 is much thinner in width than a conventional locking device integrated into a base formed into an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. The lock device 1000 is completely covered, and has an anti-fraud structure in which it is difficult to perform an illegal act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through-hole 1002, a screw stop 1003 protruding outward in the middle and above the side surface 1001 b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stop A side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protrusion 1003 protrudes protrudes forward from an upper end portion and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side), and lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. Locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is connected to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is moved upward after being inserted into the lock hole 621 from the rear side, the screwing portion 1003 and the locking portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock mounting portion 625 via the intermediary, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking of the lock device 1000 with screws is performed not only at the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also at the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 to be described later and near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The locking device 625 is also fixed to the body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), so that the lower portion of the locking device 1000 can also be mounted.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, lower, middle, and lower positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper door hook hole 620 and the upper locking hole. 621, and is positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. (The body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the front locking structure is the same as the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in contact.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion hole 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the main frame sliding rod 1050 stored therein and caulking, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably mounted vertically.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower three positions of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end portions of the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 formed respectively in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side face 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the open body frame base 600, and the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side face at the bottom. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020 penetrating the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605, a spring locking piece 1021, and an escape lateral hole 1022 are formed respectively. Although the details of the notch prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 moves forward and backward. In addition, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 has the side surface 1001b on the lower side of the lower end side of the game board holding opening 601 when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009 that projects from the front end to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and two mounting holes 1013 formed on the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 by screws 1012 are used in upper and lower positions. And a screw stop 1003 formed to mount the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement projection 1017 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and an escape lateral hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connection pin 1034. It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is mounted on the lock mounting piece 1008 on the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. The engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotated. The end side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the upward engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 during rotation.

  The cylinder lock 1010 is formed by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 from the rear side, and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the through hole.

  The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 are provided with a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, for example, using a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. Is to prevent the lowering of. As shown in FIG. 95, the anti-fraud members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved through the pivot shaft hole 1025 together with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower mounting hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are used for mounting.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically opened at a position overlapping with the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-shaped surface, and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. When the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. And the second engagement projection 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045. The first anti-fraud member 1023 has an obliquely inclined upper outer side in front of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. When the engagement cam 1016 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first tamper-proof member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. (In the clockwise direction in FIG. 97B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer side diagonally behind and below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and further from the position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. It has a regulating projection 1031 protruding downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 that penetrate in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically at the front side of the regulating projection 1031. The stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 when the main frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame from sliding illegally. In addition, the regulating protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first anti-fraud member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 rotatably by the connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second anti-fraud member 1032 connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 is formed of an inverted “L” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring engagement hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The second anti-fraud member 1032 can be relatively rotatably connected to the first anti-fraud member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first anti-fraud member 1023. I can do it. Further, the second tamper-proof member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is urged upward. Furthermore, the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower portion inside the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with three door frame hook portions 1041 protruding forward at three locations on the upper, lower, middle, and upper sides of one side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state in which the door frame sliding rod 1040 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, the lock device 1000 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main frame base 600, and A hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. The hook portion 1041 for the door frame has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, a lower portion of the uppermost rivet long hole 1042, and a door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide projection 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted into the rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame slide. The rod 1040 is formed to be vertically long so as not to hinder the ascent operation of the rod 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet long hole 1042 is in a state of contact. Also, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame has the guide projection 1043 inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. The sliding movement of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be guided.

  Further, the sliding hook 1040 for the door frame has a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at an upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward. Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and can prevent the door frame sliding rod 1040 from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become.

  Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame has a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower part. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engaging projection 1017 so as not to hinder the rotation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projection 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the sliding movement of the engagement cam 1016 raises the door frame sliding rod 1040. For engaging with. Note that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided with an escape notch 1049 at the lower rear of the vertical side, which is notched in the vertical direction to be larger than the notch 1007. The escape notch 1049 is provided by the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first anti-fraud member 1023 is securely engaged with the anti-fraud notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is cut out so as not to be lost.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not formed of one vertical metal plate as in the related art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connecting rod 1053. Thus, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet long hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates through the hook through-opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper side on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet long hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed on the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with 1050.

  The spring hook 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. The connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, when the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001. It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet penetrating in the left and right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. A long hole 1061, a descending engagement hole 1062 disposed below the rivet long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from a lower rear side of the lower engagement hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connection hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the lower hook member 1052 at the front end side, and a coupling formed at the lower part of the lower vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. It has a notch 1066 and contact portions 1067 formed on the upper and lower sides of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. And a locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed at the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is pierced, the rivet 1006 pierces the lowermost end of the rivet long hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation. For engagement. The play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is provided with the second engagement protrusion 1018 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 does not hinder the rotation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 is inserted and rotated. Is able to form a space in which the tip end can move. In addition, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052 is adapted to receive the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and When the hook member 1052 performs a sliding operation, the hook member 1052 can be smoothly slid without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the elongated rivet hole 1042 and the elongated rivet hole 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In a state where the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook through-opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in a superposed state, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the body frame After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, insert the rivet 1006 through the insertion hole 1005. .

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected with the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. It is necessary that the guide pin 1028 be further inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after being fixed to the 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Further, in a state where the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 with the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and a spring 1035 is wrapped around the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulating protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the distal end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projection insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In this manner, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the hook-shaped locking projection 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw stopper 1003 projecting horizontally is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by making it coincide with the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while fixing the rear portion. Since the screw stopper 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling as compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 96, in a state where the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hooks 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the door frame 5. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The distal end of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the downwardly engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descend. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is released, and the main frame 3 is removed by pulling the main frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, and by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper inclined portions of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since the slide rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered downward because of the contact with the lower end, the upwardly-facing claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, and the slide for the main body frame is performed. The rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the two engagement projections 1018 engages with the ascending engagement holes 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hooked state of the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is released, the door frame 5 is pulled forward by pulling the door frame 5 forward. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is upwardly inclined toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3 so that the inclined portion of the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is moved upward by contact with the upper end of the door frame, and the downwardly-facing claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are locked again, and the door frame slide The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. In addition, the sliding rod 1040 for a door frame in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hooks 1041, which are attached over the entire length and are locking portions with the door frame 5, are formed at three places of an upper end, a center, and a lower end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 over the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the gap therebetween. The act cannot be performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the door frame 5 can be unlocked from the main body frame 3. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act such that a piano wire or the like is hooked on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowered, without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Is not possible. The first structure for preventing such misconduct is a lock mechanism including a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032, and the second fraud preventing structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of FIG.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism as the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 are in contact with each other. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the first anti-fraud member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, and the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 moves to the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked and pulled down on the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame is moved. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock), and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, in the case where the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is unlocked properly, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first engagement prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The rotation of the stopper piece 1027 starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retreat from the tamper-proof notch 1007. Thus, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second tamper-proof member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement projection 1017, the tip of the first engagement projection 1017 is engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When the main frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second anti-fraud member 1032 and the second anti-fraud member 1023 are in contact with the regulating projection 1031. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second tamper-proof member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally reach the state shown in FIG. Accordingly, the first anti-fraud member 1023 and the second anti-fraud member 1032 do not become an obstacle when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being performed illegally. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the housing are completely accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. In this state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 is pulled down, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 are pulled down. This prevents unauthorized tools from entering the enclosed space, so that illegal actions cannot be easily performed.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment includes the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device integrated into the conventional L-shaped base. The mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for slidably providing the body frame sliding rod 1050 and operating the lock device 1000 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is enlarged, the lock device 1000 is firmly mounted on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

  Further, since the U-shaped base 1001 is mounted so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the same manner, are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame provided therein.

  When the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, it is extremely simple. With such a structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. Although a structure in which the formed lock attaching portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attaching piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A lock mounting hole that is screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 only by fixing the screw device 1003 on the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly to the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with rivets or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod are provided in a closed space defined by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (tablet base). 1050 may be accommodated, and the same operation and effect as the lock device 1000 described above can be achieved.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are arranged to rearward the prize ball base 710. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the base 710b, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. A prize ball device 740 partially attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 have a tank rail unit 730 and a prize ball device 74 on the rear surface. Of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. Of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. When the game board 4 is detached from the front of the game board 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they remain outside. Can easily be found from the device, and the occurrence of any trouble due to the residue can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts from being performed, and it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a high deterrent against illegal acts.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4, Foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from adhering to the rear side of the game board 4, and the game board 4 can be maintained in a good state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 (see FIG. 65) from the front end of the main body frame base 600. Since the depth D of the frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. The operation and effect can be reliably achieved. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to be a flat shape. This makes it easier to perform the mounting work for mounting the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (the main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, and the prize ball device 740 attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or abutted by other members in the installed island facility by eliminating the rearward projections. By doing so, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a simple-shaped cushioning material can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the collection efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. 4 can be made easier to see, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. In addition, the heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game due to the heat becomes unstable and the members such as the synthetic resin are deformed to suppress the occurrence of the trouble. be able to. Further, since the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that does not allow game balls to pass through, for example, even if game balls are spilled to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities, they pass through the slit 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game balls from entering the pachinko machine 1 and to prevent a problem from occurring due to the entry of the game balls.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, a basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board mounted on a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game view of FIG. 103 viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of a game panel of the game board of FIG. 103 cut in a vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the front constituent member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a gaming board viewed from the rear of FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by the player operating the handle device 500 is formed to have a substantially rectangular shape in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed behind the front component 1110 and defining a rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed below the rear of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that accommodates a main control board 4100 that is mounted on the rear surface of the game area and controls a game performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player side. To have. This game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, which are not shown in FIGS. It is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 117).

  The basic structure of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and the game board 4 is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 of the game board 4 of the present example has an outer shape of a substantially rectangular shape which can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and an inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left edge to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal; An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 and inside the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from the lower end thereof. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along a counterclockwise circumferential direction in a front view, the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner peripheral rail 1113 that allow the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 to come into contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. At the lower end of the game area 1100 at the lower end of the game area 1100, and the outer opening guide surface 1115 which is lowered rearward, is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112, and closes between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is rotated clockwise in front view and opened between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. A backflow preventing member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the front component 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 so that the main body frame 3 can be hit with a ball. It is located on an extension of the firing rail 660 of the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball hit along the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed. , Jumps over the space and is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  Also, when a game ball is strongly hit with the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the contact of the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not accepted in a winning opening (a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.) of the table unit 2000 described later, the game is performed. It flows down to the lower end of the area 1100, and is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and the lower rear side of the game board 4 from the out port 1151. To be discharged to

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hit ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the abrasion resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on a surface thereof, so that even if a game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  The front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outside of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from below the out-port guiding surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security projection 1117 on the front component member 1110 overlaps the security rear end protrusion 183 of the security cover 180 on the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thereby, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. Is not possible.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the rear component 182 of the security cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. So that the projected piece 182 after security is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to substantially contact the outer surface (the opposite side to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. With the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the post-crime protruding piece 182, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire penetrated from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the gaming area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component 1110 is disposed at a left end in a front view in a vertical direction and is disposed to be depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and vertically separated to a right end in a front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, and a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side in front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and is opened downward and has an arcuate upper side and is recessed from the front side. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape and extends upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 in a front view. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  In addition, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 allows the game board fixing tool 690 supported by the front surface of the main body frame 3 to be viewed from the front in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It has become. Also, the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used to hold the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3. In this state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the cutouts 1122 and 1152 for ball passages.

  Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 having a small thickness, and a certificate sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in a front view for attaching a certificate for certification confirmation. The fastening portion 1124 of the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, but when the game board 4 is attached to a conventional body frame, a predetermined fastening band is formed in a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame. Are wound around each other and fastened, thereby making it difficult to remove the game board 4 and preventing the game board 4 from being illegally removed.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed outside the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from both left and right ends of a lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160. A predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By attaching, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. The positioning projection 1127 is fitted in an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position on the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a woody plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guide surface 1115 of the front component 1110 at a lower portion substantially at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front-rear direction at the lower left side in the front view. And a ball passage notch 1152 which is opened downward and has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates the lower right corner in front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  In the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions near the lower left and right ends corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110, and positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 to be formed, and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and having a lower end side opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and cut out from the right end in front view so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of the present example can define a rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the front unit 2000 is attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100. When the game panel 1150 is assembled to the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 of the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the provided out port guiding surface 1115 enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate vertically in the front end of the bottom wall at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall has an out-ball. The game balls formed so as to become lower toward the discharge portion 1161 and discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160, The ball is discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the game machine are all discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In a state in which the board holder 1160 is fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 so that the board holder 1160 is attached to the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side at the left end of the rear wall of the rear wall when viewed from the rear, and a fixing portion. A locking portion 1164 that is arranged to face the 1163 and is capable of locking the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from behind. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 having an open rear side, and a thin horizontally long box shape having a front side opened by covering the rear face of the board base 1171 and fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. The main body includes a board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 in rear view and is fixed to the fixing piece 1174 to be fitted to the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and from the right end in rear view of the board cover 1172. And a resilient fixing piece projecting rearward and resiliently locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  As shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed on the right side of the rear view, two at a time, above and below the elastic fixing piece 1175 to seal the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) stuck over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal It has a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing section 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting section 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing sections 1176. Have been. In order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, the main control board box 1170 needs to cut off the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking, so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. This makes it possible to visually and externally determine whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been illegally opened.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In the main control board box 1170 of the present example, a sealing seal is stuck over the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the sealing seal is cut. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Accordingly, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or exchanged with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. In addition, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the hermetic seal are skillfully worked, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed by visual inspection, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance can be obtained. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position on the front component 1110. The display unit 1181 is provided on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

  On the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102 (A), a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in a front view. A game status indicator 1183 made up of one LED for performing the game, and two LEDs vertically arranged on the right side of the game status indicator 1183, and the number of games held on the first starting port 2201 is displayed. 1st special symbol storage display 1184 for the first, and the first special lottery result which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol storage display 1184 and which is drawn by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2201 is used as the first special symbol. A first special symbol display 1185 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying as a second symbol, and a second start port 258 disposed diagonally to the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185. The second special symbol display 1186 made up of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result selected by accepting the game ball to b as the second special symbol, and the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol storage display 1187 which is composed of two LEDs arranged on the right side in the vertical direction and displays the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b.

  The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has a normal symbol storage display 1188 made up of four LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2585a, and a display below the normal symbol storage display 1188. A normal symbol display 1189 composed of one LED for displaying a normal lottery result drawn as a result of a game ball passing through the gate portion 2585a arranged as a normal symbol, and a diagonally upper right corner of the normal symbol storage display 1188. When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2102 or the second special winning opening 2509 is displayed. And a round indicator 1190 comprising two LEDs.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red / green / orange color LED that can change its emission color. Depending on the combination, various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time reduction state, a probability change time reduction state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  When the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol variably on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2201. In this case, the number of changes (the number of storages) of the first special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has two first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b composed of predetermined LEDs. The number can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are provided. Are turned on together, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a flashes when the number of reservations is three, and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is lit when the number of reservations is three. It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  When the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol variably on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is received in the second starting port 2587b. In this case, the number of changes (the number of storages) of the second special symbol for which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has two second special symbol memory lamps 1187 and 1187b composed of predetermined LEDs, and is held by the lighting / flashing pattern of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b. The number can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are used. Are turned on together, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b flashes and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned on when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both when the number of reservations is four. It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery selected by receiving game balls into the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. The 7-segment LED is displayed after displaying the result and the second special lottery result. The 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, or orange color LED that can change its emission color, and is a combination of a light emission color and lighting / flashing. Thereby, it is possible to display a normal lottery result which is selected by a game ball passing through the gate portion 2585a. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, similarly to the special symbol, changed and displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  Also, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored (stored) ordinary symbols is displayed. The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting 普通 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of the ordinary symbols are held (stored).

  Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b, each of which includes a predetermined LED. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 of the function display unit 1180, the ordinary symbol memory. The display 1188, the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 153). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, so that the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game It is now possible for a store clerk or the like in a hall to recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 each configured by a 7-segment LED are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each configured by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

  This function display unit 1180 can also provide the same operation and effect as described above. In addition, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are constituted by eight LED groups. Compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming anxious during the game and becoming difficult to concentrate on the game. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by devoting itself to movable effects and effect images.

[1-4F. Second Embodiment of Gaming Panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as that described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is a plate-like member that is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150 and is capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110 from the outer shape of the front component 1110. It also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small external shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

  The panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, a methacrylic resin, or a glass or metal. Formed of an inorganic plate. The thickness of the panel plate 1210 is smaller than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 which are arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1212 which are arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend vertically. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and long holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is provided with a stepped engagement step 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to substantially half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, which will be described in detail later. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (not shown).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 of the game panel 1200 has a size that encompasses the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board (in this example, about 20 mm) (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step 1221 which detachably holds the panel plate 1210 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a front and rear portion having a size substantially equal to the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221. And a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. And are substantially flush with each other. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface having a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a change in temperature or a change with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. Note that the clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step 1221, and is arranged from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 that engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding step 1221. The projection is protruded toward and elastically engages with the engagement step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is arranged on the lower holding step 1221 on the lower side of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and is located between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel. In a state where a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, it is configured to extend a predetermined amount upward (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, panel holder 1220 and front component 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided at its rear side with a mounting support portion 1227 which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower side and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to the mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height such that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side projects rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth) can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 114 etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment supporting portion 1227 (in this example, approximately 2.5 mm). And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from protruding rearward from the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 (Pachinko machine 1) can be reliably installed and installed in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, in the panel holder 1220, as shown, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and into which predetermined screws can be screwed are arranged. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is provided with a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure) projecting forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a front flange shape in the back box 3010). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a substantially rectangular (square hole) blind hole as viewed from the rear.

  It should be noted that, for the mounting hole 1228, a hole having a large diameter and a hole having a small diameter are mixed, and a mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is selected according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. Note that, as shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within the range, the panel holder 1220 Since the front surface is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, so that the game ball fired from the hitting ball firing device 650 is smoothly guided. It has become so. Further, as shown in the drawing, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For example, a box-shaped rib is formed.

  Note that the panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning device such as an obstacle nail implantation device (not shown) or an assembling jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail implantation device. It can be set in the state where it was done. In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrating horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end in front view and downward. And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protruding portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed forward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and has a lower end side opened downward. A notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and cut out so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). The positioning protrusion 607 provided is fitted to the positioning protrusion 607, and the game ball 4 is relatively moved in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3 by fitting the out ball discharge groove 1235 to the positioning protrusion 607. It is being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step 1213 are engaged. By the combination, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. The panel board 1210 can be set on the conventional obstacle nail implantation device while the panel plate 1210 is held in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost for implanting the obstacle nail. You can do it.

  Although not shown, the gaming panel 1200 of the present example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge array in a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And a front unit 2000 can be attached. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, only the front unit 2000 is supported on the thin panel plate 1210, so that the panel plate 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit 2000.

  Furthermore, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure including the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and to provide a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen from the player through the board 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, and the like changes depending on the type of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 having the game board 4 capable of supporting various models can be provided only by replacing the panel plate 1210 alone.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which are mounted and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if the positions are different. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of the front component]
Next, a front component 1110A in a form different from the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108 have the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 in the embodiments shown in FIGS. Only the configuration is different from that of FIG. 103 to FIG. 105, and the detailed description is omitted here.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIG. 106 and FIG. 107 is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configuration is the same as that of the front component 1110, the same reference numerals are given, and the detailed description is omitted. In the gaming board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the gaming board 4 (in this example, the front unit). 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending from the outer opening guide surface 1115 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front to the stop portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arc shape is formed from the stop portion 1114 to a position immediately above the right side stamp sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stop portion 1114, and the outlet port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. It is formed in a linear shape that is inclined so that the space up to the guiding surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-port guiding surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 as compared with the above-described front component 1110, so that the player can be more enjoyed by the wide game area 1100. I can do it.

  In the examples of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game panel 1150 consisting of a single plate as shown at 101 may be attached.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the security structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board accommodated in the main body frame as seen from the rear.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108, the security structure on the pivot side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. , And a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of a synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

  As described above, the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, an aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the game panel 4 combined with the front component 1110 (1110A) and the game panel 1150. The side security plate 950 extends in the up-down direction and also extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending inward (open side) substantially perpendicularly from the front end of the side plate 952 a. Piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side plate piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance behind the front end piece 952b, and a substantially right angle inwardly extending from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  In addition, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 (main body 952) is increased by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d that are arranged at right angles to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the entire body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the supporting side is provided with a supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened outwardly (on the supporting side). In the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, and the supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is mounted and supported on the main body frame 3 only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support 156 and the lower shaft support 158, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side is provided. When an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the supporting metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk that wrongdoing will take place. On the other hand, in the security structure of the present example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. A piece on the rear side of the U-shaped protrusion 166 of the reinforcement unit 150 in the door frame 5 which is formed in a substantially U shape is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is supported by the front end piece 952b. It is configured to be sandwiched between the side U-shaped protruding pieces 166. Thus, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is closed. Can be prevented from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, so that the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being cut open, and the main body frame can be prevented. 3 can be prevented from being fraudulently performed such as opening the door frame 5.

  In addition, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, the gap between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be hardly distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side plate piece 952a on the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 on the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 may be temporarily behind the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. Is broken, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot enter the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a, and an illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the side security plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. To be able to fully counter vandalism. Generally, in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of an island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to penetrate behind the rear end of the side plate piece 952c, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Then, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731 and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3 are used for the game board 4 Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is opened, it can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily detected, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. Further, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against illegal acts. ing.

  In addition, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. When the game board 4 is attached to / detached from the main body 3, even if tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are moved outside. , It is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of gaming board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the gaming board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind.

  The game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is formed by a player operating the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A that defines the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven in, and a plate-shaped component that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A so as to close the game area 1100 and that defines the rear end of the game area 1100. Game panel 1150. Note that the game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wooden plywood such as a plywood.

  Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the back surface of the game panel 1150, and a back unit 3000 attached behind the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side. A liquid crystal display device 1900 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 mounted on the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main device mounted on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160. And a control board box 1170.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 4 of the present example includes a plurality of entrances (winning openings) through which game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received, and a frame arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 1100. A center role 2500 and a function display unit 1180 attached outside the game area 1100 and capable of displaying a game state. As the plurality of reception ports, a first starting port 2201 arranged at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100, a second starting port 2587b arranged to the right of the first starting port 2201, a gaming area 1100 A general winning opening 2301 arranged at the lower left of the inside, a first attacker unit 2100 arranged just below the first starting opening 2201 and just above the out opening 1151, and an upper right opening of the second starting opening 2587b. A second attacker unit 2570, and a gate 2585a disposed on the upper right side of the center role 2500.

  First, the first starting port 2201 has a box-like shape with an upper opening, and can always receive a game ball driven into the game area 1100. The first start port 2201 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and, as will be described later in detail, is disposed directly below the chance exit 2506d on the stage 2506 of the center role 2500, and is discharged from the chance exit 2506d. Game balls can be accepted with a high probability. Note that the first starting port 2201 is provided with a first starting port sensor 2422 that detects a game ball received.

  In addition, the gate portion 2585a has a gate shape, and allows a game ball to always pass through. The gate portion 2585a is disposed immediately below the passage 2509a opened near the impact portion 1114 of the front component 1110A, and can pass the game balls released from the passage 2509a with an extremely high probability. The gate 2585a is provided with a gate sensor 2586 for detecting a passing game ball.

  Further, the second starting port 2587b includes a horizontally long plate-shaped movable piece 2589 slidable in the front-rear direction by a starting port solenoid 2590. When the movable piece 2589 moves to the protruding position where the movable piece 2589 protrudes forward while the game ball cannot be accepted to the 2587b, the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2587b. The second starting port 2587b is a variable winning port by the movable piece 2589.

  In addition, a guide portion 2581 for guiding a game ball diagonally downward and leftward is provided above the second starting port 2587b, and a game discharged from the guide portion 2581 is provided to the left of the guide portion 2581. A collision portion 2583 that changes the traveling direction downward when the ball collides is provided. For this reason, the game ball released from the side of the second attacker unit 2570 disposed on the upper right side of the second starting port 2587b is guided obliquely downward left by the guidance section 2581, and then released from the guidance section 2581. The game ball collides with the collision portion 2583, and flows downward from the gap between the guide portion 2581 and the collision portion 2583. In a state where the movable piece 2589 has moved to the projecting position, it is possible to receive the game ball flowing down from the gap between the guiding portion 2581 and the collision portion 2583, and move the game ball diagonally downward right by the movable piece 2589. By guiding and guiding toward the second starting port 2587b, it is possible to win the second starting port 2587b. On the other hand, in a state where the movable piece 2589 is accommodated in the retreat position, the game ball flowing down from the gap between the guiding portion 2581 and the collision portion 2583 is not received, and passes through the front side of the movable piece 2589 and falls downward. It is supposed to.

  In addition, the movable piece 2589 is in a state of being accommodated in the retreat position in a normal state, and according to a normal lottery result that is determined by detecting passage of a game ball by the gate sensor 2586, that is, the normal lottery result is determined. When it is "normal hit", the state changes from the retreat position to the protruding position. The second starting port 2587b is provided with a second starting port sensor 2593 for detecting a received game ball.

  In addition, the general winning opening 2301 has a box shape with an open top, and can always receive a game ball driven into the game area 1100. The general winning opening 2301 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3421 for detecting an accepted game ball.

  In addition, the first attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long plate-shaped opening and closing member 2104, and has a first big winning opening 2102 that can receive a game ball when opened. In this first attacker unit 2100, the opening / closing member 2104 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis by a first attacker solenoid 2107. When the opening / closing member 2104 is substantially vertical, a game ball is inserted into the first big winning opening 2102. When the opening / closing member 2104 is in a substantially horizontal state, it is possible to receive a game ball in the first big winning opening 210, which is a so-called variable winning opening. Have been. Further, the first attacker unit 2100 is disposed below and to the left of the second starting port 2587b, and a game ball released from the side of the second attacker unit 2570 but not accepted by the second starting port 2587b, After being guided obliquely downward and leftward by the guide wall surface 2582 disposed below the second starting port 2587b, it is discharged above the first attacker unit 2100. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2102 is opened, the game ball released from the second starting opening 2587b can be received with a high probability.

  The opening / closing member 2104 is in a substantially vertical state in a normal state, and according to a special lottery result selected by detecting the reception of the game ball by the first starting port sensor 2422 or the second starting port sensor 2593. That is, when the special lottery result is "big hit", the state is changed from a substantially vertical state to a substantially horizontal state. In addition, the first special winning opening 2102 is provided with a first count sensor 2111 for detecting an accepted game ball.

  The second attacker unit 2570 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long plate-like opening / closing member 2572, and has a second big winning opening 2509 that can receive a game ball when opened. In the second attacker unit 2570, the opening and closing member 2572 is slidable in the front-rear direction by the second attacker solenoid 2574. When the opening and closing member 2572 projects to the front projecting position, the second attacker unit 2570 While it is impossible to receive the game ball, when it moves to the retracted position in which the opening / closing member 2572 is accommodated, it becomes possible to receive the game ball in the second big winning opening 2509, so-called, It is a variable winning opening. In addition, the second attacker unit 2570 is disposed below the gate portion 2585b, and a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a and a game ball that has not passed through the gate portion 2585a have a flow-down passage having a notch like a saw tooth. After being guided downward while reducing the flow speed of the game ball by 2505, the ball passes through one of the branch passages 2507 that can branch the game ball in two directions, from the junction thereof to above the second attacker unit 2570. It is to be released to. Therefore, when the second special winning opening 2509 is opened, a game ball guided from the side of the gate 2585a can be accepted with an extremely high probability.

  On the other hand, when the second special winning opening 2509 is closed, the opening / closing member 2572 is in a state of protruding to the projecting position, and the game ball guided from the side of the gate portion 2585a is guided obliquely downward left by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 2572. After that, the air is discharged above the second starting port 2587b.

  In addition, the opening and closing member 2572 is in a state of protruding to a protruding position in a normal state, and according to a special lottery result selected by detecting the reception of a game ball by the second starting port sensor 2593, that is, a special lottery. When the result is "small hit", the state changes from the projecting position to the retreat position. In addition, the second big winning opening 2509 is provided with a second count sensor 2578 for detecting an accepted game ball.

  In addition, the second attacker unit 2570 has a guide path 2621 for guiding the game ball received in the second big winning opening 2509 to the distribution member 2620, and holds one game ball guided by the guide path 2621. A sorting member 2620 having a ball entry opening 2622 capable of receiving the game ball at the time of clockwise rotation so that the ball entry opening 2622 of the sorting member 2620 faces the right distribution passage 2623. 2626, and a disengagement passage 2628 that can receive a game ball during left rotation so that the ball entrance 2622 of the distribution member 2620 faces the left distribution path 2625. The distributing member 2620 is configured such that the driving motor 2624 allows the entrance 2622 of the distributing member 2620 to rotate in the left-right direction with reference to a position where the entrance 2622 faces the guidance passage 2621. When the ball opening 2622 rotates right after holding one game ball, the game ball distributed to the right distribution passage 2623 passes through the V winning opening 2626, while when rotated left, it is distributed to the left distribution passage 2625. The released game ball passes through the passing passage 2628.

  In addition, the distribution member 2620 distributes one game ball held at the entrance 2622 to either the right distribution passage 2623 or the left distribution passage 2625, thereby forming the V winning opening 2626 or the outgoing passage 2628. After passing through any one of the above, by returning the entrance ball 2622 again to the reference position facing the guidance passage 2621, the next game ball accepted by the second large winning opening 2509 is returned to the entrance ball 2622. It is possible to hold. Therefore, even when a large number of game balls are received when the second special winning opening 2509 is opened, the received game balls are held one by one in the ball entrance 2622 in order, and the right distribution path 2623 or By allocating to any of the left distribution passages 2625, it is possible to successively pass through any of the V winning opening 2626 or the outgoing passage 2628.

  In addition, the distribution member 2620 is in a state where the ball entrance 2622 faces the guidance passage 2621 in a normal state, is received by the second special winning opening 2509, and the reception of the game ball is detected by the second count sensor 2578. In accordance with the result of the determination, the one game ball held in the entrance 2622 is replaced with the V winning opening 2626 on the right distribution path 2623 or the outflow passage 2628 on the left distribution path 2625. Is to be distributed to either. In addition, as will be described in detail later, each time ten game balls are received in the second winning port 2509, one game ball held in the ball entry port 2622 is moved to the V winning port on the right distribution path 2623 side. 2626. That is, until nine game balls are received in the second big winning port 2509, one game ball held in the ball entry port 2622 is sequentially distributed to the departure passage port 2628 on the left distribution path 2625 side. After that, when the tenth game ball is received in the second winning hole 2509, one game ball held in the ball entrance 2622 is distributed to the V winning opening 2626 on the right distribution path 2623 side. Like that. As described above, the probability that the game balls accepted by the second winning opening 2509 will be accepted by the V winning opening 2626 is 1/10 (if the number is equal to the number of entered balls to the predetermined second starting opening 2509). (It is not necessarily limited to 1/10.), So that there is no bias in the reception to the V winning opening 2626.

  The V winning opening 2626 is provided with a V winning opening sensor 2627 for detecting a passing game ball, and the off passing opening 2628 is provided with a passing passage sensor 2629 for detecting a passing game ball. Further, as described above, the opening / closing member 2572 responds to the special lottery result that is determined by detecting the reception of the game ball by the second starting port sensor 2593, that is, the special lottery result is “small hit”. Occasionally, the state changes from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the game ball can be received in the second big winning opening 2509. However, the tenth game ball is received in the second big winning opening 2509. (When the tenth game ball is received by the second count sensor 2578), the ball is distributed by the distribution member 2620 to the V winning opening 2626 on the right distribution passage 2623 side (V winning opening sensor). The reception of the game ball is detected by 2627), so that the "big hit" (big hit) is obtained, and the same as when the special lottery result is "big hit", the first attacker unit 21 It is adapted to open and close the opening and closing member 2104 of 0.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a and penetrates in the front-back direction. Box 3010 having an opening (not shown) formed therein, a panel relay board 3020, a lamp drive board 3021, a motor drive board 3023, and a front lamp relay board 3025 attached to the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. ing.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the gaming board 4, a peripheral control board for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 112) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, which will be described in detail later. A box 1910 is provided.

  The game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped center role 2500 attached to the game panel 1150 so that the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the player substantially in the center of the game area 1100. I have. Although details will be described later, the game ball hit into the game area 1100 can flow down the left and right sides of the center role 2500. Further, in the game area 1100, an area from the left side to the lower side in the front view of the center role 2500 is formed in a relatively wide area through which game balls can flow, and a plurality of obstacle nails ( (Not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

  The game board 4 according to the present embodiment passes the space between the inner rail 1112 and the game ball by driving the game ball leftward in front view, that is, the left route 1100L side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center role 2500. Down the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when entering a warp entrance 2503 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2506. The game balls supplied to the stage 2506 are released into the game area 1100 after rolling on the stage 2506 in the left-right direction, and can enjoy a movement different from the movement by the obstacle nail and a chance of the stage 2506. When the game ball is released from the exit 2506d into the game area 1100, the first starting port 2201 can be won with a high probability.

  Also, when a game ball hit to the left route 1100L side does not enter the warp entrance 2503, the probability of the game ball being lower than that of a game ball released from the stage 2506 to the game area 1100 is low, There is a possibility that the first start port 2201 will be won.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is hit on the right side in front view, that is, on the right route 1100R side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center role 2500, the right outer circumference of the center role 2500 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100 are shifted. Through the narrow gap, and enters the passage 2509a opened near the stop portion 1114 of the front component 1110A, and is discharged immediately above the gate portion 2585a. That is, by making a right-handed hit, the game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2585a with extremely high probability.

  Although details will be described later, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and is detected by the gate sensor 2586, a normal lottery result is drawn and executed in a very short time. If the result is “normal hit”, the movable piece 2589 moves to the projecting position, and the game ball is guided to the second starting port 2587b according to the gradient of the movable piece 2589, and the game received by the movable piece 2589 A ball can be made to win the second starting port 2587b. In addition, most of the game balls hit into the right route 1100R side pass through the front side of the movable piece 2589, so that when the movable piece 2589 moves to the protruding position, the right-handed shot is performed with a very high probability. A winning can be made to the second starting port 2587b. When the normal lottery result is “normal loss”, the movable piece 2589 is housed at the retreat position, and the game ball passing through the gate 2585a is not received by the movable piece 2589, and the second starting port is not received. There is no winning of 2587b.

  In addition, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, a special lottery result lottery is performed, and a special lottery result in which a special advantageous game state in which a player such as a big hit game is advantageous occurs. When "big hit" is selected by lottery, the opening / closing member 2104 rotates in a predetermined pattern so that game balls can be received in the first attacker unit 2100, and the game balls that have entered the first attacker unit 2100 are The big winning opening 2102 can be won. In addition, since many of the game balls hit into the right route 1100R are guided above the first attacker unit 2100, when the first large winning opening 2102 is opened, the game ball hits right, so that it is high. The first large winning opening 2102 can be won with a probability. When the special lottery result is “losing”, the opening and closing member 2104 is closed, and the game ball does not win the first big winning opening 2102.

  Further, when a game ball is won in the second starting port 2587b, when "small hit" is drawn as a special lottery result, the opening / closing member 2572 slides in a predetermined pattern to play the game to the second attacker unit 2570. The ball can be accepted, and the game ball that has entered the second attacker unit 2570 can be made to win at the second winning port 2509. In addition, since most of the game balls hit to the right route 1100R side are guided to above the second attacker unit 2570, when the second big winning opening 2509 is opened, right hits are performed, so that the game balls are high. It is possible to win the second big winning opening 2509 with probability.

  When a game ball wins in the second big winning opening 2509, the winning game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2626 on the right distribution passage 2623 or the left distribution passage 2625 on the left distribution passage using the distribution member 2620. It is to be distributed to any of the outgoing passages 2628. Each time ten gaming balls win the second big winning opening 2509, they are sorted by the sorting member 2620 to the V winning opening 2626 on the right sorting passage 2623 side, so that a "big hit (grand hit jackpot)" As in the case where the special lottery result is “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2104 of the first attacker unit 2100 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern.

  As described above, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, the right and left sides of the center role 2500 can play games with different impressions, and provide various games so as not to get tired. Can be.

[3. Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of the main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 for controlling payout of game balls and the like. Also, a group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects during a game based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on a command from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 112, a main control board 4100a for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100h to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d and RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first starting port sensor 3422 for detecting a game ball received by the first starting port 2201 and a second starting port sensor for detecting a game ball received by the second starting port 2587b. 2593, and a detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3421 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2301 is input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or a gate sensor 2586, a general winning opening sensor 3421. The detection signals from the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the V winning opening sensor 2627, the outgoing passage sensor 2629, and the magnetic detection sensor 3423 are transmitted to the panel relay board 3020 attached to the game board 4, The data is input via the control I / O port 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2590 and the first A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2107, the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the drive motor 2624. One special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory display 1184, second special symbol memory display 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory display 1188, game status indicator 1183, output drive signal to round display 1190 Or.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3422, the second starting port sensor 2593, the gate sensor 2586, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the V winning opening sensor 2627, and the departure passing port sensor 2629. Uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3421 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b and frequently passes through the gate portion 2585a, so that the first starting port sensor 3422, the second starting port sensor 2593, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2586 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, and the gate sensor 2586. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2102 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the game ball of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is used. Detection also occurs frequently. In addition, when the small hitting game state occurs, the second large winning opening 2509 is opened, and the game ball frequently wins, and is distributed to either the V winning opening 2626 or the outgoing passage 2628 by the distribution member 2620. The detection of a game ball by the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the V winning opening sensor 2627, and the outgoing passage 2628 frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the V winning opening sensor 2627, and the outgoing passage 2628. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2301 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3421 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensor 3421, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to a peripheral control unit 4140 of a peripheral control board 4010 to be described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). The main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140, as will be described in detail later.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 includes an electric double-layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. To be described). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the RAM 4100e during power-off processing even when power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b and also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 112, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, the firing control by the firing solenoid 654, and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for performing control, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720 , A tank rail 731, and a ball release switch 860 b for discharging a game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 112, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU 4111a, a payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, an external WDT 4111c (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally, and a prize. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the RAM clear switch 4100c being input through the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the winning ball relay board 754.

  A ball out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball path 741c formed in the base unit 741. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the winning ball relay board 754 of the winning ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first output from the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is transmitted to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal first. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED display. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output via the payout control I / O port 4111b. For example, the main control board 4100 transmits the number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. This external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is reported that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 4100 Is notified that the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply path 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740). (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotator 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When That the payout rotator 748 is difficult to rotate because of the engagement with the technical ball near the entrance), and when the number “3” is displayed, it is a “count switch error” (specifically, Is notified based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error” (specifically, payout). The number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, from the full-state detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the game balls are full of the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout). control That the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "stocking" (specifically, it is still in stock). That the number of unpaid game balls has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b are first transmitted via the frequency display plate 365, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is output from the payout control I / O port. 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. Further, the CR unit updates the residual value of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and transmits a signal for displaying the residual value on the residual number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal board. 874, the main-side relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control section]
As shown in FIG. 112, the firing control unit 4120 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. . The launch timing control circuit 4120c generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillating circuit 4120b so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is in contact with the rotary handle main body 506, and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether to forcibly stop launching a game ball by a player's will. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. A signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotation position of the rotary handle main body 506 is first supplied to the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d fires, based on a signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength appropriate for the rotational position of the rotary handle front 506. When the reference pulse is inputted, the pulse is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By outputting the ball, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one ball of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is output. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the hitting ball firing device 650 side. Thus, while the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 4110 in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 4110.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 112, the peripheral control board 4010 performs a performance control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 112, a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and performs high-quality performance. The sound source IC 4140c includes a sound ROM 4140d that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sends the various commands to the decorative boards of the game board 4 based on the various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3021 or the game board. The game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided in the game machine 4 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the motor attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. To transmit a drive signal to the drive board 3023 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 A door-side drive comprising door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5. Emission data is transmitted from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3111 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via a motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Have been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are based on the door frame base board. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, which are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. are doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 controls the music and sound effects and the like according to various effects to flow, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. The speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding backward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  The peripheral control unit 4140 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a. A diagnosis is made as to whether or not the own system is running away by using the WDT together.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) Bits per second (hereinafter, referred to as “bps”). On the other hand, initial data, a door frame side lighting / flashing command, a game board side lighting / flashing command, a movable body driving command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3021 or the motor driving board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The lamp driving board 3021 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal on the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. Each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. is output to an LED, and the game board 4 is provided with a lighting signal or a blink signal based on the received game board side lighting / flashing command. Or output to the LED of each decorative board.

  A motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. 414, each drive motor provided in the game board 4, etc., a solenoid, and the like.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or receives a signal from the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. Input is made via a lamp driving board 3021 or a motor driving board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the motor 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on a sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and outputs a lamp drive board 3021, a motor drive board 3023, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and a peripheral relay terminal board. 882, from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222, 262 of the door frame 5, or from the speaker 821 of the body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 3021, the motor drive board 3023, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged above the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. An acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added) as sound information is sent to the bass speaker 821. Thus, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound effect) having a more realistic feeling than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 112, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a video display processor (VDP) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various data of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a character ROM 4150d. A character RAM 4150e to which various stored data is transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140, and draws images on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Control. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-progress signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the in-progress signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Note that the VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is sent to the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data, and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored and affects the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. Note that the sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is called a “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as “sprite overlapping order”).

  In addition, the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats a main scan for setting a display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction in order from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 sequentially performs one line of drawing data from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output of one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data of the next line is input, based on the drawing data of the next line. As main scanning, the data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Game content]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are moved to the game panel 1150. Is hit into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front of the game, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the left or right game area 1100 above the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger it can be driven. Also, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and when the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails, the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game balls, so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side in front view, that is, the left route 1100L side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall 2502 of the center role 2500, the inner ball 1112 It flows down the left side of the center role 2500 through the space. Then, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2503 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall 2502 of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2506. In this stage 2506, when the ball is rolled in the left-right direction and then released forward from the lowest part, it is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2506d opened immediately above the first starting port 2201, and has a high probability. The first start port 2201 is accepted. Then, when the game balls are received by the first starting port 2201 and detected by the first starting port sensor 3422, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls are obtained from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the upper plate 301.

  Note that the game balls released from the stage 2506 into the game area 1100 do not enter the first starting port 2201 and flow down to either the left or right side of the first starting port 2201. When the big winning opening 2102 is in the open state, it is possible to win the first big winning opening 2102 with a high probability.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center role 2500 and from the stage 2506 to the game area 1100. Although the probability is lower than that of the released game balls, there is a possibility that the first starting port 2201 arranged below the center role item 2500 may be won. Also, a game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 may have a chance of winning in the general winning opening 2301, and when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 2301 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3421, The main control board 4100 transmits a predetermined payout command to the payout control board 4110 based on the detection signal, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301.

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 1100 enters the right route 1100R on the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2502 of the center role 2500, the center role Through a narrow gap between the right outer periphery of the 2500 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, the vehicle enters the passage 2509a opened near the stopper 1114 of the front component 1110A on the inner periphery of the game area 1100. Since the game ball that has entered the passage 2509a is released immediately above the gate 2585a, it enters the gate 2585a with an extremely high probability.

  At this time, when a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the main control board 4100 generates an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result based on the detection signal. On the basis of the ordinary random numbers, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is changed (for example, the ordinary symbol indicator 1189 composed of two LEDs of red and green alternately emits light), and is displayed for a predetermined time ( For example, the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) extracted after the lapse of 0.1 second to 1 second is stopped and displayed (any one of two LEDs of the ordinary symbol display 1189 emits light). Is done. The variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table.

  More specifically, when the random number selected as a lottery is a "normal hit" random number, the stoppage is displayed with a normal symbol indicating a hit (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the random number selected as a lottery is a "normal loss" random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol indicating loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating "normal hit" is stopped and displayed, the movable piece 2589 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 2587b projects for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds to 3 seconds). , And the game ball can enter the second starting port 2587b.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to be extremely short as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the game ball which has passed through the gate portion 2585a and has a lottery of “normal hit” is released above the second starting port 2587b by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570, and is discharged to the second starting port 2587b. At a timing as to whether or not the movable piece 2589 for guiding the game ball reaches the front side, the movable piece 2589 is moved to the protruding position by the starting port solenoid 2590 and can be received in the second starting port 2587b, and the “normal hit” Is accepted to the second starting port 2587b with extremely high probability.

  Then, when a game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2587b by passing through the gate portion 2585a and selecting "normal hit", it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2593, and based on the detection signal of the second starting port sensor 2593. In the main control board 4100, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command so that one game ball is provided. It is paid out to the upper plate 301.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball performs a driving operation (so-called right-handed operation) that passes on the right side of the center role 2500, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a with a very high probability and the game that has passed through the gate portion 2585a. When the ball is drawn in the "normal hit", the ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2587b with a very high probability, so that even a beginner or a player unfamiliar with the game can easily win a prize in the second starting port 2587b, and the player can enjoy the game. You can do it.

  By the way, as described above, in the present pachinko machine 1, a game ball can be easily won to the second starting port 2587b by the player right-handed. When the number of the game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed increases, and there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 may be hesitant to install. However, in the present pachinko machine 1, since the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 2587b is one, the game is performed by the lottery of the special lottery result by the winning in the second starting port 2587b. It is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while increasing the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed without any problem.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586 while the ordinary symbol is being displayed while being changed on the ordinary symbol display 1189, the changing ordinary symbol is stopped and generated and extracted earlier. Until the result of the ordinary random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is temporarily stored, and the display thereof is suspended, and is stored. The number of ordinary random numbers (also called the number of reservations) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is made up of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit can indicate the number of storages. In this example, up to four can be stored and displayed. If the number of storages exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and the "normal loss" is drawn, the movable piece 2589 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 2587b is kept in the retracted position. The game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the movable piece 2589, and is discharged by the guide wall surface 2582 into the game area 1100 in the front view of the first big winning opening 2102 of the first attacker unit 2100. It should be noted that the game balls released from the guiding wall surface 2582 into the game area 1100 have a high probability of winning in the first special winning opening 2102 when the first special winning opening 2102 is in an open state due to a big hit game or the like. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a is discharged to the upper part of the second attacker unit 2570 through the circulation passage 2505 and the branch passage 2507, so that the small winning game 2509 is opened by a small hit game or the like. In the state, the player wins the second big winning opening 2509 with extremely high probability. Therefore, at the time of a big hit game or the like where the first big winning opening 2102 can be accepted or at a small hit game or the like where the second big winning opening 2509 can be accepted, the game ball is right-handed so as to flow down the right route 1100R. By doing the above, it is possible to easily cause the game balls to win the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509.

  By the way, in the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game ball wins in the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b and is detected by the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593. Then, a predetermined first special random number is generated and extracted in the first starting port 2201, and a predetermined second special random number is generated and extracted in the second starting port 2587b. Then, based on the extracted special random numbers, after the special symbol display displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 corresponding to the function display unit 1180 is started, the special symbol is displayed. The special symbol corresponding to the random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting a "big hit", the opening / closing member 2104 of the first attacker unit 2100 causes the opening / closing member 2104 in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) in which the opening and closing operation is performed occurs, and during that time, the game balls are won in the first big winning opening 2102, whereby more game balls can be obtained. When one game ball wins in the first big winning opening 2102, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 in a manner indicating “small hit”, the opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 operates to open and close in a predetermined pattern. (For example, a small hit game) occurs, and by causing a game ball to win in the second big winning opening 2509 during that time, more game balls can be obtained. When one game ball wins the second big winning opening 2509, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  In addition, also in the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol change display due to the passing of the game ball to the gate portion 2585a. At 1186, when the special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, or when a special symbol such as a big hit game or a small hit game as a special advantageous game state cannot be fluctuated and displayed, the game ball is transferred to the starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b. Wins and is detected by the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593, the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593 are used until the special symbol change display becomes possible. The first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection signal are temporarily stored and the display thereof is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is stored. Displays the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 is composed of two LEDs. In this example, up to four can be stored and displayed, respectively. If the number of storages exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded. When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (reserved), the second special random number is executed (digested) prior to the first special random number. . That is, the holding of the lottery result related to the second starting port 2587b is executed (executed) prior to the holding of the lottery result related to the first starting port 2201.

  Further, the main control board 4100 compares the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3422 with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a hit determination table), It is determined whether the special random number is “losing” or “big hit”. Also, the main control board 4100 compares the first symbol random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3422 with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a symbol determination table), It is determined whether the “big hit” is either “16R normal big hit (16R non-time saving big hit)” or “16R short time big hit”.

  On the other hand, the main control board 4100 compares the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the second starting port sensor 2593 with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a hit determination table). It is determined whether the special random number is “losing”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. Also, the main control board 4100 compares the second symbol random number extracted based on the detection of the second starting port sensor 2593 with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a symbol determination table), The "big hit" is determined to be "16R hourly big hit".

  Then, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 sets the opening / closing member 2104 of the first attacker unit 2100 to the open state, and then waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 30 minutes). Second), or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are satisfied in the first big winning opening 2102, the opening / closing member 2104 is closed. Is called one round) a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). In this example, at the time of "16R big hit", 16 rounds are repeated to generate a special advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, when the extracted second special random number is “small hit”, the main control board 4100 elapses a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the opening and closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is opened. Alternatively, an opening / closing pattern for closing the opening / closing member 2572 when one of the conditions for winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls in the second big winning opening 2509 (one opening / closing pattern is one round) ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). In this example, one round is executed at the time of the "small hit", and an auxiliary game state advantageous to the player is generated. When a game ball wins in the second big winning opening 2509, the winning game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2626 on the right distribution passage 2623 side or the left distribution passage 2625 side using the distribution member 2620. Sort to any of the off passages 2628. Then, every time 10 game balls win the second big winning opening 2509, they are sorted by the sorting member 2620 to the V winning opening 2626 on the right sorting passage 2623 side, so that "16R hour-hour jackpot (casual hit jackpot) )), And the opening / closing member 2104 of the first attacker unit 2100 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern in the same manner as when the first special random number or the second special random number is “16R big hit”, and a special advantageous game advantageous to the player. A condition can be generated.

  In addition, when the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “16R time saving big hit”, and when the extracted second special random number is “small hit”, the game ball which has won the second big winning opening 2509 Is distributed to the V winning opening 2626 and becomes “16R hourly jackpot (casual hit jackpot)”, the special lottery result is “ordinary hit” after the end of the special advantageous game state (for example, jackpot game). A time-saving gaming state (time-saving state) in which the probability of becoming extremely high is generated. Therefore, during a time-saving game, the frequency of movement of the movable piece 2589 to the protruding position increases, and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 2587b, so that the game ball flows down the right route 1100R. It is preferable to make a right-handed operation. On the other hand, when the extracted first special random number is “16R normal jackpot (16R non-hours jackpot)”, the normal lottery result becomes “normal hit” after the end of the special advantageous game state (for example, the jackpot game). A normal game state (normal state, non-time saving state) in which the probability is extremely low is generated. Therefore, in the normal game (non-time-saving game), the movable piece 2589 hardly moves to the protruding position, and it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second starting port 2587b. It is preferable to make a left hit so that the game ball flows down the left route 1100L with the aim of.

  In addition, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is placed in any of the general winning opening 2301, the first starting opening 2201, the second starting opening 2587b, the first winning opening 2102, and the second winning opening 2509. If no prize is won, the game board 4 is discharged from the lower end of the game area 1100 in the left and right direction at the lower end in the left-right direction to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, the game ball is any one of the general winning opening 2301, the first starting opening 2201, the second starting opening 2587b, the first big winning opening 2102, and the second big winning opening 2509 (V winning opening 2626 and outgoing passage 2628). Is won, the winning game ball is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without returning to the inside of the game area 1100.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 112). The variation display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. In this way, the symbol display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, which is particularly noticed by the player, is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The “big hit game effect image” displayed during the “big hit” game and the like is also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, and to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player and less tiring. Has become.

  In addition, in addition to controlling the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 appropriately drives the drive motors and the drive solenoids provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, the decorative board, and the like based on the command related to the lottery result. It is possible to perform a movable effect and a luminous effect, and entertain the player with the movable effect and the luminous effect.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 113A is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a control process performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first executes various registers and main control as a process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. The data stored in the built-in RAM 4100e is initialized. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. The RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the data is present, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of storing information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is executed. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. When the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization processing without executing the recovery processing. When the initialization process is performed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) to be provided for a lottery process on a display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped, The variable random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of the above, and the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. The reach random number provided for the lottery process of whether or not the symbol random number (the first symbol random number, the first symbol random number, the first symbol random number) to be provided for the lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number. A random number counter for holding random numbers such as (two pattern random numbers), random numbers (ordinary random numbers) used for a lottery process related to a hit at the time of operation of the movable piece 2589, and the like. Eteiru.

  In the present example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use the same reach random number, that is, even if the first start port 2201 is started, the second start port 2587b is started. Even in this case, the reach random number is updated from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach random number is updated from a different counter. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach symbol corresponding to the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number may be different from the first reach determination table. By providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not involved in the random numbers are updated. After the processes in steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process in step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 113B, in this interrupt control, first, register save processing is performed as the processing of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2586, the first starting port sensor 3422, the second starting port sensor 2593, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the general winning port sensor 3421, and the like. And detection signals from various sensors. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number (special random number, ordinary random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped among the random numbers is updated. An operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner as the process of step S14. Execute Although the special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is described. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a hit at the moment of operation of the movable piece 2589. In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the movable piece 2589 becomes higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state (excluding some big hits). It is configured to execute (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, such a time-saving state is realized by shortening the time required for the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, in the control of the time reduction state (time reduction control), the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 99/100 (per 99%), and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a non-zero value. The time is shortened to a predetermined time (for example, 0.08 seconds) shorter than the time saving state, and when the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols is a hit, the movable piece 2589 of the second starting port 2587b is set to, for example, 5.5 seconds. By retreating, the second starting port 2587b is controlled to be in an open state so that game balls can be received in the second starting port 2587b, and then advanced again to be unable to receive game balls in the second starting port 2587b. To In the time reduction control, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol may be set to 100/100 (per 100%).

  On the other hand, in the control in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 1/100 (per 1%), and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (for example, 5 seconds). ), The frequency at which the second start-up port 2587b is controlled to be in the open state is extremely low, and during the non-time saving state, game balls are hardly accepted into the second start-up port 2587b. In addition, when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the movable piece 2589 of the second starting port 2587b is moved for the same time as the time saving state (5.5 seconds in this example). 2589 may be retracted to allow the receiving of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b, and then advanced again to disable the receiving of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b. When a hit occurs, the movable piece 2589 of the second starting port 2587b is retracted for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds, and allowed to accept game balls in the second starting port 2587b, and then advanced again. The game balls may not be accepted into the second starting port 2587b. In addition, by setting the probability of winning a normal symbol in the non-time saving state to 0%, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being accepted into the second starting port 2587b in the non-time saving state.

  As described above, in the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set lower than that in the time saving state, so that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b hardly occurs, so that even if the player hits right, It is difficult to start the variable display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display 1186. Therefore, in the non-working time state, a game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called “left”) so that many game balls enter the first start port 2201 instead of the second start port 2587b. Striking "). In addition, when the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is hit during the non-working time, when the movable piece 2589 of the second starting port 2587b is retracted to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 2587b, By notifying the player that the movable piece 2589 is to be retracted, the player temporarily fires the game ball aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed) to play the game ball to the second starting port 2587b. May be made to aim for a prize. In this example, the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called left-handed), so that the game ball cannot pass through the gate portion 2585a, and the right side of the center role 2500 is aimed at. The game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2585a only when the game ball is fired (so-called right-handed), but the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed). By arranging the gate portion 2585a at a position where the game ball can pass through the gate portion 2585a even in the left-handed state, the lottery result of a normal symbol can be easily hit even in a non-time saving state, and the second starting port 2587b is opened. It may be easy to execute an effect of notifying the control to the state and instructing the player to win a game ball to the second starting port 2587b.

  On the other hand, in the time reduction state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is 99%, and the movable piece 2589 of the second starting port 2587b is further retracted for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). This facilitates winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2587b. Therefore, in the non-working time state, a game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 (so-called “right”) so that many game balls enter the second start port 2587b instead of the first start port 2201. Striking ").

  In addition, as the time saving control, control for increasing the winning probability of the ordinary symbol than in the non-saving time state, control for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol than the non-saving time state, and movement of the second starting port 2587b Control to extend the period of retreating the piece 2589 from the non-time saving state, control to increase the number of times the movable piece 2589 of the second starting port 2587b is retracted from the non-time saving state, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second Any one or any of the controls for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1186 (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900) than in the non-time saving state. Combinations (or all) may be executed.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes the special symbol process as the process of step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the above-described normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the first starting port sensor 3422, the second starting port sensor 2593, the first count sensor 2111, and the second count sensor 2578 as the process of Step S19. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3421 and the like are in the ON state, the prize ball processing for outputting the payout control command to the payout control board 4110 so as to pay out the prize balls corresponding to the signals is executed. . Thus, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 2201 and the first starting port sensor 3422 is turned on, “3 balls”, a game ball wins in the second starting port 2587b and the second start starts. When the mouth sensor 2593 is turned on, "1 ball" is entered, when the game ball wins the first big winning opening 2102, and when the first count sensor 2111 is turned on, "14 balls", the second big winning opening 2509 becomes. When the game ball wins and the second count sensor 2578 is turned on, "14 balls" is won, and when the game ball wins in the general winning port 2301 and the general winning port sensor 3421 is turned on, "10 balls" is awarded. Each ball is paid out to a player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of holdings as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), and the contents of the register are restored (step S23). When the interrupt is permitted (step S24), this control ends. Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting port sensor 3422 The first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2201) (step S31), and this is built in the main control. A first start opening passage process such as storing in a first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2593 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2587b) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second starting port passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is set. Is performed (step S40). In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped indicate "big hit". In this case, the count sensor 2114 detects that the first big winning opening 2102 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2102. When the process of controlling the 16R jackpot game state (which may be simply referred to as a 16R jackpot game state that is open for a long time) that repeats the opening / closing pattern to be closed when closed 16 times becomes a mode suggesting a "big hit" In addition, after the first big winning opening 2102 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when nine game balls are won in the first big winning opening 2102, the count sensor 114 executes a process of controlling the 16R jackpot gaming state repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern to be closed when detected (sometimes simply referred to as 16R jackpot gaming state for a long time open) in.

  In the present embodiment, a left-handed state in which a game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 2201 is mainly executed, and a game mainly based on winning of a game ball in the second starting port 2587b is executed. To the right-handed state. Specifically, when the time reduction control is executed, the vehicle is controlled to the right-handed state, and when the time reduction control is not executed, the vehicle is controlled to the left-handed state.

  The shift control from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state is performed based on reaching the upper limit of the variable display times (the number of time savings) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) capable of executing the time saving control described later. In this case, the transition control is performed from the right-handed state to the left-handed state without causing a big hit. On the other hand, when the vehicle is controlled to the non-time saving state, the shift control from the left-handed state to the right-handed state can be controlled only when the big hit is caused.

  In the big hit control process, after performing such opening control of the special winning opening 2103, each process of setting the time reduction flag and the time reduction counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving control is being executed, and when the big-hit game state based on the big-hit (16R-hour-light-and-big-hit) to perform the time-saving control after the big-hit gaming state ends, specifically, the big-hit control process ( In step S40), after opening / closing control of the first big winning port 2102 according to the 16R big hit gaming state (for example, after opening the first big winning port 2102 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or playing the game ball at the first big winning port 2102) Is set in the big hit control process (step S40) when the opening / closing control for repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed when the first count sensor 2111 detects that nine prizes have been won is completed. In the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 122 or the second variation pattern setting process (not shown), the Is reset by the second special symbol stop process Tsu not be expectorated or first special symbol stop processing or illustrated shown in FIG. 124 described later when the next a jackpot bets. The time saving counter is set to a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) as the number of time savings in relation to the setting of the time saving flag in the big hit control process (step S40). When the time reduction flag is set in the process and the second special symbol stop process (not shown), “1” is decremented each time the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being controlled is set (step S36). If the hit execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a mode suggesting “small hit”, the second big winning opening 2509 is set for a predetermined period ( After the second count sensor 2578 detects that one game ball has been won in the second big winning opening 2509, or when the second count sensor 2578 detects that one game ball has been won in the second big winning opening 2509, a process of closing the game is executed. Also, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening 2509 enters the V winning opening 2626, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the first big winning opening 2102 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). When the first count sensor 2111 detects that 9 or more game balls have been won in the later or big winning opening 2103, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times and the control is shifted to the 15R big hit game state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a sets the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area if neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set. On the condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38). On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not "0" (step S37), the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. A second special symbol process including a lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting port passage process (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, when it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3422 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2201, it is determined as shown in FIG. 115. First, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM 4100e, and the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value ( It is determined whether or not “4” which is the upper limit value (step S52). In the process of step S52, if it is determined that the number of reserved special first symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display control of the first special symbol to a suspended state. The processing of S53 to S54 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S54, each random number obtained in step S51 is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. And the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S52 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2593 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2587b, as shown in FIG. 116, The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S61.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM 4100e, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on the counter value. It is determined whether it is a certain “4” (step S62). In the process of step S62, when it is determined that the number of reserves of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a suspended state. The processing of S63 to S64 is performed. That is, first, as the process of step S63, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S64, each random number obtained in step S61 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e. And the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S62 that the number of reserved special second symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. In other words, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S63 to S64, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held.

  Further, when the number of reserved special first symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2201, a command (No. The one-number-of-reservation designation command 0-4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, and when the number of reservations of the second special symbol changes based on the game ball having entered the second starting port 2587b, the storage processing is performed. In (Step S20), a command (second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) for designating the reserved number of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. A first special symbol in which a first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is read, and a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number is performed. Normal processing (step S80)

  2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining a mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on a result of a lottery process on a display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )

  3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the first special symbol are described. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process is performed (step S82)

  4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83).

  5. The state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 113).

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 118, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S101. In the process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the held state based on the counter value of the first special held number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is then stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e as a process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is stored in the same main control built-in RAM 4100e. Read from Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special reserved number stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e is stored. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol storage area a to first special symbol storage area d). The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the variable display control suspension is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become. Similarly, the second special symbol storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol storage area a to second special symbol storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning in the second opening 2587b. The extracted random numbers are stored sequentially from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the second special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  Then, thereafter, as a process of step S105, a hit determination process as a lottery process of the hit of the big hit or the small hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process is ended.

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the hit determination table shown in FIG. 120 (A) with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 120A, the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d, and is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, nine kinds of first special random numbers that match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and are different from the big hit determination value. The first special random number is matched with the small hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit, and the 390 kinds of first special random numbers are matched with the loss determination value indicating that the first special random number is out of shape. Each is associated (big hit probability; 1/400, small hit probability; 9/400, combined probability of big hit and small hit; 1/40). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, it is compared with the first special random number. 9 types of second special random numbers that match the big hit determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the big hit and are different from the big hit determination value in the same way as the hit determination table referred to The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with the small hit determination value indicating that the second special random number is equal to the outlier determination value indicating that the 390 kinds of second special random numbers are outliers (big hit probability; 1/400, small hit probability; 9/400, combined probability of big hit and small hit; 1/40).

  The hit determination table and the small hit determination value set in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number and the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number may be different. (The number of the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value may be the same number, without changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability. (It may be different, or one or both of the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be made different by changing the number of one or both of the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value.) .

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that it is a big hit (step S115). Then, a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination processing ends.

  Also, as a result of comparing the selected hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, if it is determined that the small hit is determined (step S117), the change is determined to be a small hit. A small hit flag indicating that the winning has been set is set (step S118), and the hit determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state, and is used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. A state determination table. In the reach determination table in the time reduction state, the reach is determined so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach is possible, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that reach is not possible. Random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that the reach numbers of five types including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time reduction state reaches the reach determination value, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that no reach is made. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the non-time reduction state is set higher than in the time reduction state.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). Is set, and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 121, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first sets The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 120 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process The big hit symbol as a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined by comparing the obtained symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 120 (B), in the symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with each other according to the determination result (16R normal big hit, 16R short time big hit). Have been. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, it is set so that the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are different. ing.

In particular,
1. The first large winning opening 2102 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor 2111 detects that nine game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2102. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big hit game state in which the game ball can enter (easily) the first big winning opening 2102, and is controlled to a non-time saving state after the big hit game state is completed. The first large winning opening 2102 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first counting sensor 2111 detects that nine game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2102. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning opening 2102, and the number of times the special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) are changed and displayed. The 16R time-saving big hit is controlled until either the number of time savings reaches 100 times or the next time a big hit game state is established, whichever comes first.

  In the symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 50 determination values are allocated when a 16R normal big hit is made, and 50 determination values are allocated when a 16R short time big hit is made. In other words, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a 16R time-saving big hit is controlled with a probability of 50% after the big hit game state ends to the time-saving state. On the other hand, the symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number indicates that all 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 16R time saving big hit and a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number. Is a 16R time-saving big hit that always controls the time-saving state after the big hit gaming state ends.

  In the left hit state, the game ball does not pass through the gate 2585a, and the movable piece 2589 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, no winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b occurs, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2201 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except in the case, only the first special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1185 is executed, and hits related to the first special symbol (16R normal big hit, 16R short time big hit) are generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win the first starting port 2201. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 displays the second special symbol except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol. Only the fluctuation display is executed, and a hit (16R hour time big hit, small hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the 16R normal big hit is determined, the 16R normal big hit is determined as the big hit symbol. . In addition, although not shown, when it is determined to be a 16R time jackpot in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, a 16R time jackpot symbol is determined as a big hit symbol.

  When the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether the small hit flag is set (step S133), and the small hit flag is set. If so, the small hit symbol is determined (step S134). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the winning symbol is determined (step S136).

  Then, after the determination process for the stopped symbol is performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the lottery result (any of the type of the big hit, the small hit, the out of reach, and the out of place) as the process of step S137. (A command to stop the first special symbol) may be sent to the peripheral control board 4010 to set a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), the process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received judgment result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → the middle decoration). The symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the symbols (note that the left, middle and right decorative symbols may be synchronously displayed in the same symbol in a fluctuating manner and simultaneously stopped and displayed). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped to change, a case where 16R normal jackpot is selected among the jackpots from the received determination result notification command. Is determined to be a 16R normal jackpot symbol (combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same even symbols among the symbols of "0" to "9"). It is determined to be a 16R hour-hour jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols excluding "1" among the symbols "0" to "9"). In addition, when a small hit is specified, a small hit symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all "1"; "111") is determined. If the outlier is determined to be the outlier design (a combination of the same design in which the left and right decorations are "0" to "9" and the middle decorations are different; reach loss design) , A non-reachable design (combination in which at least the left and right decorations are different among the left, middle, and right decorations), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (game At the end of the effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 122, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag If it has been done (step S141), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and a small hit flag is set. Is set (step S143), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S144), and if the reach flag is set (step S145), the reach variation pattern table (not shown) is set. (Not shown) (step S146), and either the big hit flag or the reach flag is selected. If not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the first special symbol display display control is performed by the first special symbol display 1185 for the thus determined fluctuation time, and the effect control is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Will be performed.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table includes a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 4100a determines the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Are obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the mode of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, out of 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is to be performed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach having a low jackpot expectation degree. The determination values (164 to 222) are set as the determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be performed. ). In addition, the super-reach production is that the big hit expectation degree is higher than the normal reach production, and for the player who wants to generate the big hit game state, when the super reach production is executed, the player's expectation degree for the big hit game state is It is growing.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of a loss which is provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state are common. And a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of losing which is provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time of 5 seconds is set as the time saving state. In addition, a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. As described above, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time reduction state and in the non-time reduction state, so that the game ball is promoted to the second starting port 2587b in the time reduction state, and the player is activated by the second starting time. The time for allowing the game ball to win in the mouth 2587b is secured.

  In addition, as described above, in the right-handed state, only the interval that allows one game ball to pass is provided, and the rolling of the game ball is limited, and the guide to the gate portion 2585a and the second starting port 2587b is provided with extremely high probability. Is done. That is, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2585a with a very high probability, and the symbol is usually hit, and in the state where the movable piece 2589 of the second starting port 2587b is retracted, it is extremely high. The game ball is configured to be accepted to the second starting port 2587b with a probability (substantially all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center role 2500). Further, in the time reduction state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 99% hit, and when the ordinary symbol hits, the movable piece 2589 of the second starting port 2587b is extended for a long time (5.5 seconds in this example). , And the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2587b.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time-saving counter for setting the number of continuations of the time-saving state is “0”. If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is "0" (step S153). . Then, as a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving control is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, and if it is determined in step S153 that the counter is not “0”, Then, the processing shifts to the processing of step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), the process ends.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 123, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S171. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the lottery variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 124, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S181. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1185 is performed as the process of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, the number of time savings is 100), the time saving control is ended and the control in the non-time saving state is started. become.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit game state (step S187), and The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set, and if the above time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (16R normal jackpot start command, 16R hour jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (16R ordinary jackpot, 16R hour jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit specified by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like.

  The big hit executing flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is, when the big hit gaming state ends, specifically, in the big hit control process (step S40), the first big winning port corresponding to the type of the big hit. Opening / closing control of 2102 (for example, in the case of "16R big hit"), after opening the first big winning opening 2102 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when 9 game balls have won the first big winning opening 2102. When the opening / closing control for repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the first count sensor 2111 is completed 16 times (all rounds executable in the big hit game state), the big hit control process (step S40) is reset. You. The big hit execution flag is reset so that the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is set. And the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 can be executed.

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S186 and the small hit flag is set (step S190), a small hit start command indicating to start the small hitting game state is set (step S191). The standby time until the start of the small hitting game state (the time for displaying the start of the small hitting game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S192), and the small hitting flag is reset and the small hitting game state is set. After executing the process of setting the small hitting execution flag indicating that is being executed (step S193), the process shifts to step S194. When the big hit game state is started, a process of resetting the time saving flag is executed as shown in step S189. On the other hand, when starting the small hitting game state, the time reduction flag is not reset. In other words, the game state (especially whether the time saving state or the non-time saving state) does not change before and after the small hitting game state.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, that is, when the big hit flag is out of place, the process proceeds to step S194 without executing the processes of steps S187 to S189 and S191 to S193.

  When the processes of steps S186 to S193 are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (Step S 194), and this process ends.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

  1. Small hit start processing for executing setting processing for starting the small hit game state (step S400)

  2. Small hit processing during monitoring of the entry and release time of the game ball in the small hit game state (step S401)

  The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 113).

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit start process (step S400).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first decrements the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the start of the small hitting game state by 1 as the processing of step S411, and if the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S412). ) The process ends without executing the subsequent processes. Note that the interval timer is set based on the fact that the small hit flag is set when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped as described above (second special symbol stop processing).

  On the other hand, if the interval timer has timed out (YES in step S412), the opening time of the second special winning opening 2509 is set in the opening timer (step S413), and the small hit opening time production command is set (step S413). S415), the second big winning opening 2509 is controlled to be open (step S416).

  Thereafter, when the small hitting process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hitting middle process (step S401) (step S417), this process ends.

  As described above, in this example, without resetting the ball entry counter for counting the game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 2509 in the small hitting game state, the player enters the second big winning opening 2509 in the small hitting game state. The winning game balls are counted cumulatively.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit processing (step S401).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the second count sensor 2578 detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening 2509 as the process of step S421, If it is detected that a game ball has entered the large winning opening 2509, the above-mentioned ball entry counter is incremented by 1 (step S422), and whether or not the counter value of the ball entry counter is 10 or more, that is, the second large ball It is determined whether or not ten or more game balls have entered the winning opening 2509 (step S423).

  If it is determined in step S421 that the game ball has not entered the second special winning opening 2509, the opening time from when the second special winning opening 2509 is controlled to the open state to when the second special winning opening 2509 is controlled to be closed is determined. The open timer shown is decremented by 1 (step S425), and it is determined whether or not the open timer has timed out (step S426). If not (NO in step S426), the subsequent processing is not performed. The process ends, and if a timeout has occurred (YES in step S426), the flow advances to step S427.

  If ten or more game balls have entered the second special winning opening 2509 in step S423, the game ball that last entered the second special winning opening 2509 is guided to the V winning opening 2626. Then, control is performed to drive the drive motor 2624 to rotate the distribution member 2620 clockwise (step S424). On the other hand, in step S423, if ten or more game balls have not entered the second big winning opening 2509, the entered game balls are guided to the escape passage 2629 without being guided to the V winning opening 2626. Control is performed to drive the drive motor 2624 to rotate the distribution member 2620 counterclockwise in order to perform the rotation. It should be noted that the drive motor 2624 is also driven to move the distribution member 2620 to the left with respect to game balls other than the game ball that has finally entered out of the 10 or more game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 2509. By executing the control to rotate, it is guided to the departure passage port 2629.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the small hit execution flag (step S427), and controls the second big winning opening 2509 in the open state to the closed state (step S428).

  At this time, if a game ball has entered the V winning opening 2626 (step S429), a 1R end command indicating that one round of the big hit game state is ended is set (step S430), and the time until the start of the big hit game is set. After the standby time is set in the interval timer (step S431), the big hit execution flag and the bonus hit flag indicating that the big hit game state has been set based on the V winning during the small hit game state are set (step S431). Step S432). The bonus hit flag is used to determine whether a big hit game state has been reached or a big hit symbol has been stopped and the big hit game state has been reached based on the fact that a V-prize has been won during the small hit game state in the big hit control process (step S40). If the bonus winning flag is set, the player is notified as if the second round of the 16R jackpot game state, which is executed over 16 rounds when the 15R jackpot game state is executed, is executed. The player will recognize that the 16R big hit game state is being executed including the small hit game state.

  When the process in step S432 is completed and when it is determined in step S429 that there is no V winning, when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the small hit start process (step S400) (step S400) S417), this process ends.

  As described above, in this example, if at least one game ball enters the second big winning opening 2509 when the small hitting game state is executed, the second big winning opening 2509 is set even if the opening timer has not timed out. The small hitting game state is ended by controlling to the closed state. In addition, when 10 game balls enter the second big winning opening 2509, one gaming ball is always guided to the V winning opening 2626, and a big hit game state is generated. Therefore, the small hit game state is won 10 times. By doing so, a jackpot game state can be generated.

[6. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 128, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting processing, processing for clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every time 2 mS elapses, and executes the 2 mS regular processing. In the 2 mS steady processing, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when the 16 mS has elapsed, the 16 mS elapsed time has elapsed. At the same time as setting the flag T, a process of resetting (clearing) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter to 0 is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapse flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS regular processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapse flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapse flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapse flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS regular processing, processing for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like is executed based on a command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 mS steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16mS. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 mS regular processing executed every 16 mS in the sub main processing. In the 16 mS regular processing, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control processing of step S602, the liquid crystal is set based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting processing, the second fluctuation pattern setting processing). The control processing related to the display device 1900 is executed.

  In the sound control processing of step S603, control processing related to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3021 and the like are executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS regular processing ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is started immediately after the 16 mS elapses from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process (the command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 mS has elapsed during the execution of the 16 mS steady processing, only the 16 mS elapsed flag is set. When it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapsed flag has been set after the end of the 16 mS steady processing, the 16 mS steady processing is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 mS regular processing in the sub-main processing.

[7. Games during non-working hours]
Next, a game executed in a non-time saving state (a so-called normal state) among the games realized by the above processing will be described. As described above, in the non-working time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 1/100, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b hardly occurs. A so-called left-handed operation of firing a game ball aiming at the left side of the game is performed.

  In a left-handed state in which a game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center role 2500, a game based on winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2201 is executed. Then, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 2201, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 1185.

  In addition, in the lottery process based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2201, a lottery (hit determination process) of whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is performed. If it is done, a lottery (first special symbol stop symbol setting process) for controlling to the time saving state or the non-time saving state after the big hit gaming state is further performed.

  By the lottery of controlling the time reduction state or the non-time reduction state after the big hitting game state ends, a determination is made as to whether to continue the left-handed state or shift control to the right-handed state after the big hit game state is completed. . That is, when the big hit is completed, the 16R is controlled to the left-handed state continuously after the big hit game state is completed, and the 16R time is controlled to the time-saving state after the big hit game state is ended. In the case of a big hit, the control is shifted to the right-handed state after the big hit game state ends.

  In this example, when the first special symbol is a big hit, the ratio of the 16R normal big hit and the ratio of the 16R big hit are 1: 1. Then, as described above, the jackpot probability is set to 1/400, and the probability of controlling the transition from the left-handed state (non-time-saving state) to the right-handed state (time-saving state) as a big hit is 1/800. Has become.

  In addition, in the case of a small hit in the first special symbol, when the 15R big hit game state is controlled based on a game ball entering the V winning opening 2626 during the small hit game state, the big hit game state ends. After that, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is controlled to the time-saving state until the variable display count reaches 100 times or until the next big hitting game state is established.

[8. Game during working hours]
Next, a game executed in a time saving state will be described. As described above, in the time-saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 99/100, so that game balls can frequently enter the second starting port 2587b and enter the first starting port 2201. The jackpot probability based on the second special random number acquired at the time of entering the second starting port 2587b is smaller than the combined probability (1/400) of the jackpot probability and the small jackpot probability based on the first special random number acquired at the time. Since the combined probability (1/40) with the small hit probability is set to be 10 times higher, so-called right-handedness for firing a game ball aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 is usually performed.

  In addition, when a lottery is determined in the lottery process based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b, if the lottery is determined, the number of times the special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) are changed and displayed after the big hit game state ends. Until the number of times reaches 100 or until the next big hit gaming state is established, the time saving state is controlled. In addition, after a lottery is determined in the lottery process based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b, a 15R big hitting game state is established based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning opening 2626 during the small hitting game state. In the case of controlling the game, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) until the variable display number reaches 100 times after the big hit game state ends, or until the next big hit game state occurs. The time saving state is controlled until it is established first.

  As described above, in this example, if a big hit or a small hit is made in the right-handed state in the time saving state and a big hit is made based on a game ball entering the V winning opening 2626, a big hit game state After the end of the operation, the time saving state is controlled again, and the right-handed state is continued. On the other hand, in the right-handed state in the time saving state, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) does not become a big hit or a small hit in the period until the number of times of display changes reaches 100 times, Even in the case where the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 2626, the time saving state ends and the transition to the non-time saving state is controlled. Then, the shift control from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state is controlled so that the shift control from the right-handed state to the left-handed state is performed.

  Note that, as described above, in the small hitting game state, after the second big winning opening 2509 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when one game ball wins in the second big winning opening 2509, the second winning winning opening 2509 is determined. When the two-count sensor 2578 detects the signal, a closing process is performed. Therefore, when the game ball is intermittently fired aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 when the small hitting game state is set, the probability that one game ball enters the second big winning opening 2509 is unlikely. Extremely high.

  Also, in this example, when ten gaming balls enter the second big winning opening 2509 in the small hitting gaming state, one gaming ball is always guided to the V winning opening 2626. . Therefore, in the lottery process based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, if the lottery is performed 10 times as a small hit, it is determined that the lottery is substantially a big hit. It can be said that the same game value is provided.

  Further, in this example, every time ten game balls enter the second big winning opening 2509, one of the gaming balls is guided to the V winning opening 2626, so that a big hit gaming state can be generated. In other words, it can be said that a big hit game state can be generated every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls enter the second big winning opening 2509. Also, in this example, when the 15R big hit game state is controlled based on the game ball entering the V winning opening 2626 during the small hit game state, the special symbol (the first special symbol, The time saving state is controlled until either the variable display number of the second special symbol) reaches 100 or until the next big hit game state is established. In other words, it can be said that a time-saving state can be generated every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls enter the second big winning opening 2509.

  In the above-described example, if at least one game ball enters the second big winning opening 2509 in one small hitting game state, the second big winning opening 2509 is controlled to the closed state to change the small hitting gaming state. The second big winning opening 2509 is controlled to be closed when a plurality of (for example, two) less than 10 game balls are hit in one small hitting game state. Then, the small hitting game state may be ended. In this case, if ten game balls enter the second big winning opening 2509, one gaming ball is always guided to the V winning opening 2626, and a big hitting game state occurs. By winning a plurality of times less than (for example, five times if it is possible to enter two game balls in one small hitting game state), a big hitting game state can be generated.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine may be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main frame 4 Gaming board 5 Door frame 1100 Gaming area 1110A Front component 1150 Gaming panel 1180 Function display unit 1900 Liquid crystal display 2000 Table unit 2100 First attacker unit 2102 First winning opening 2104 Opening / closing member 2201 First starting port 2301 General winning port 2500 Center role 2502 Perimeter wall 2509 Second big winning port 2570 Second attacker unit 2572 Opening / closing member 2585a Gate 2587b Second starting port 2589 Movable piece 2620 Distributing member 2622 Entrance ball opening 2626 V winning opening 2628

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
As the profit-giving state given to the player based on the type of hit drawn by the lottery means, the low profit-giving state where the expected value of the profit is low or the high expected value of the profit which is higher than the low profit-giving state. Profit provision control means for controlling to a profit provision state,
Auxiliary right acquisition means capable of acquiring a value of an auxiliary right for controlling to the high profit provision state based on control to the low profit provision state;
Auxiliary right accumulating means for accumulating a value of the auxiliary right obtained based on controlling to the low profit giving state as an accumulated value,
Auxiliary right accumulation time control means capable of controlling to the high profit giving state by the value of the auxiliary right accumulated by the auxiliary right accumulation means being a value satisfying a predetermined achievement condition as the accumulated value; ,
The value of the accumulated value itself that has been accumulated is not understood by the player,
Wherein when the value of the accumulated value by the value of the auxiliary rights acquired become per controlled to the low profit applied state is a predetermined achievement condition is satisfied values, the predetermined achievement condition is satisfied low income applied state In, the game in the low profit provision state is performed in a form in which the player can recognize that it is controlled to the high profit provision state,
The high profit provision state controlled by the value of the cumulative value being a value that satisfies the predetermined achievement condition by the value of the supplementary right acquired as a hit controlled in the low profit provision state is It is controlled to the high profit giving state without performing a normal game after the end of the low profit giving state,
When the control to the high profit giving state is performed by the supplementary right accumulating time control means when the value of the cumulative value becomes a value satisfying the predetermined achievement condition in a time when the low profit giving state is controlled. The value of the accumulated value accumulating the value of the supplementary right acquired by the supplementary right acquisition means becomes an initial value,
The profit provision state given based on the lottery by the lottery means is such that the low profit provision state where the expected value of the profit is low is more easily provided than the high profit provision state where the expected value of the profit is high. A gaming machine characterized by the following.